Apparatus and method for measuring the phase and magnitude of microwave signals

LIMITED COPYRIGHT WAIVER
A portion of this patent document, contains material to which a claim of copyright protection is made. The copyright owner has no objection to the facsimile reproduction by anyone of the patent document, or the patent disclosure as it appears in the U.S. Patent and Trademark Office patent file records, but reserves all other rights whatsoever.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
1. Field of the Invention
The invention relates generally to systems for measuring microwave frequency signals and more particularly to systems used to extract phase and magnitude information from microwave frequency signals.
2. Description of the Related Art
Earlier vector network analyzers with integral processors exist which can perform both phase and magnitude measurements of microwave frequency signals. Unfortunately, there have been shortcomings with these earlier analyzers. In particular, such earlier analyzers often employed relatively expensive techniques to achieve frequency accuracy from a microwave frequency signal source. Furthermore, such earlier analyzers often performed measurements of signals relatively slowly, were relatively clumsy to operate and failed to conveniently provide to an analyzer user desired microwave frequency measurement information.
Thus, there has been a need for a more economical microwave frequency signal measurement system which takes more rapid measurements of microwave frequency signals, which is relatively easy to use and which can, at any moment, provide a user with a wider range of microwave frequency measurement information. Furthermore, there has been a need for such a system which provides relatively low noise signals for phase and magnitude measurement. The present invention meets these needs.
SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
The present invention provides a measurement system. The system includes a source of signals at discrete microwave frequencies in a prescribed microwave frequency range. The signal source receives feedback signals. The discrete microwave frequency signals are substantially phase-locked to at least one downconverted signal in response to the feedback signals. Downconverting circuitry linearly downconverts the signals at the discrete frequencies and provides the at least one downconverted signal. A phase detector receives the at least one downconverted signal and provides the feedback signals.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
Further details of the present invention are explained with the help of the attached drawings in which:
FIG. 1 shows a block diagram illustrating the measurement system of the present invention;
FIG. 2A illustrates the system of FIG. 1 operating in the harmonic mode;
FIG. 2B illustrates the system of FIG. 1 operating in the direct mode;
FIG. 3A illustrates further details of the test set 106 of FIG. 1;
FIG. 3B illustrates details of the the analyzer 108 of FIG. 1;
FIG. 4 illustrates details of the splitter 110 of FIG. 1;
FIG. 5 illustrates details of one of the harmonic mixers 174 used in the present invention;
FIG. 5A illustrates the nature of the harmonic mixer of FIG. 5 in a harmonic mode;
FIG. 5B illustrates the filter behavior of the harmonic mixer of FIG. 5 in a harmonic mode;
FIG. 6 illustrates details of the first local oscillator 122 of FIG. 1;
FIG. 7 illustrates details of the phase lock circuit 252 used to control the frequency of operation of the first local oscillator of FIG. 6;
FIG. 8 illustrates details of the harmonic generator 170 of the present invention;
FIG. 9 illustrates details of the second local oscillator 124 of FIG. 1;
FIG. 10 illustrates details of the phase lock circuit 314 used to control the frequency of operation of the second local oscillator 124 of FIG. 9;
FIG. 11 illustrates details of image reject mixer 183 and its associated variable driver assembly 177 for the present invention;
FIG. 12 illustrates details of the calibration oscillator 134 and the third local oscillator 128 of FIG. 1;
FIG. 13 illustrates details of a respective fourth local oscillator 146 and the details of one of the three synchronous detectors 130 and two of the six sample/hold circuits 148 from FIG. 1;
FIG. 14 illustrates details of the source lock circuitry 154 of FIG. 1;
FIG. 15 illustrates the ability of the system to select unevenly spaced discrete frequency points;
FIG. 16 illustrates the ability of the system to select evenly spaced frequencies;
FIG. 17 illustrates conditions necessary to create a spurious If signal;
FIG. 18 shows an algorithm for automatically checking for spurious harmonics;
FIGS. 19-20 provide schematic diagrams illustrating details of the test set I/O circuit 534 of FIG. 3B;
FIG. 21 provides a timing diagram illustrating the processor pipeline timing of the system of FIG. 1 for three sequential stimulus signal frequencies: F.sub.N-1, F.sub.N and F.sub.N+1 ;
FIG. 22 shows exemplary components of a source locking circuit 154 of FIG. 1;
FIGS. 23-32 illustrate details of the test port connectors of the present invention;
FIG. 33 illustrates the types of measurements that the model 360 is capable of making;
FIG. 34 shows the network analyzer is a tuned receiver;
FIG. 35 shows a phase reference can be obtained by splitting the microwave source signal;
FIG. 36 illustrates phase measurement using a split microwave source signal and replacing a DUT with a length of transmission line;
FIG. 37 illustrates a test signal lagging the reference signal by 360 degrees;
FIG. 38 illustrates a test signal path length 0.1 wavelength longer than that of the reference signal;
FIG. 39 shows a plot of measured phase vs. frequency due to length differences between a reference and test signal connection;
FIG. 40 illustrates insertion of a length of line to make reference and test signal paths equal;
FIG. 41 displays the phase vs. frequency response of a device with a path lengh difference between reference and test signals;
FIG. 42 shows the resultant measurement path length difference between reference and test signals with software compensation;
FIG. 43 shows definition of a reference enabling definition of reflection characteristics from forward and reference directions;
FIG. 44 illustrates the four scattering parameters;
FIG. 45 illustrates display of linear phase vs. frequency;
FIG. 46 illustrates polar display;
FIG. 47 illustrates a Smith Chart display;
FIG. 48 illustrates vector error correction;
FIGS. 49-50 show WILTRON Test Sets;
FIG. 51 illustrates smoothing;
FIG. 52 illustrates the control panel layout;
FIG. 53 illustrates the calibration keys;
FIG. 54 provides a flowchart describing the calibration sequence;
FIGS. 55-57 show calibration menus;
FIG. 58 is a utility menus key flow chart;
FIG. 59 shows available display formats;
FIG. 60 illustrates marker annotation for different graph-types;
FIG. 61 shows the data, menu and sweep indicator areas of the display;
FIG. 62 is a flow chart of a display control algorithm for selection of an active channel;
FIG. 63 shows a Tabular Printout Format;
FIG. 64 shows an Alternate Data Format;
FIG. 65 shows a header which prints before the screen data prints;
FIGS. 66-68 illustrate measurement of group delay;
FIG. 69 illustrates a set up for testing active devices;
FIG. 70 illustrates that measurements of active devices are made with a reference plane outside the device;
FIG. 71 illustrates testing an ideal device;
FIG. 72 illustrates the nonideal transition from a coax structure which affects freely moving the reference plane;
FIG. 73 shows some of the special test-fixture calibration standards that are available;
FIG. 74 shows open, short and termination measurement configurations with transition from a coax to permit solving for unknowns;
FIG. 75 illustrates a calibration device including a varactor with three known impedances;
FIG. 76 illustrates an impulse response for different circuit elements;
FIG. 77 illustrates the impulse response of a stepped attenuator;
FIG. 78 illustrates the impuilse response for a series inductance;
FIG. 79 illustrates use of the impulse response to locate a discontinuity in a cable;
FIG. 80 shows the bandpass-impulse response for various impedance discontinuities;
FIG. 81 illustrates a phasor-impulse response for various devices;
FIG. 82 ilustrates utilization of lowpass impulse, lowpass step and bandpass responses for a complex impedance device;
FIG. 83 shows phasor-impulse response displays one discontinuity at a time;
FIG. 84 illustrates windowing;
FIG. 85 illustrates gating;
FIG. 86 illustrates gating of an antenna transmission measurement to remove unwanted ground reflections;
FIG. 87 illustrates bus interface connections;
FIG. 88 illustrates typical handshake operation; and
FIG. 89 illustrates a binary data transfer message format.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENT
Referring to FIG. 1, there is shown a first block diagram illustrating the measurement system 100 of the preferred embodiment, The system generates stimulus signals over a range of individual frequencies. For each frequency, a stimulus signal is applied to a Device Under Test (DUT) 102. For each frequency, the system produces test signals which contain phase and magnitude information which can be used to characterize the DUT 102 at that frequency. The test signals comprise bidirectional signals transmitted through or reflected by the DUT 102 at the stimulus signal frequency. The system also produces reference signals at the stimulus signal frequency. The system downconverts the test and reference signals from the stimulus signal frequency, to a DC in phase and quadrature component. For each stimulus signal frequency, the system produces digital logic level signals carrying phase and magnitude information which characterize the DUT 102 at the particular stimulus signal frequency. The digital logic level signals are provided to digital processing circuitry 190 which, in addition to processing the digital logic level signals and producing a display, controls the signal source 104 via signals on GPIB 265.
In the first block diagram, details of the system 100 relating to the processing of the digital logic level signals and to the display of the phase and magnitude information have been omitted in order to simplify the diagram. These components are described in relation to other figures.
The measurement system 100 includes a signal source 104 which provides individual stimulus signals over a range of frequencies. The system includes a test set shown within dashed lines 106. The test set 106 splits stimulus signals into two signals at the stimulus signal frequency. One of the two split signals is used as a reference signal, and the other split signal is provided to the DUT 102 to generate test signals at the stimulus signal frequency. The test set 106 can provide split signals to the DUT 102 in either a forward or a reverse direction, as described below, so as to generate forward and reverse scattering parameters for the DUT 102.
The test signals comprise split signals transmitted through the DUT 102 or reflected by it. The phase and magnitude of the test signals relative to the reference signal depends upon the characteristics of the DUT 102. Thus, for each individual stimulus signal frequency, the phase and magnitude of the test signals relative to those of the reference signal provides information about the characteristics of the DUT 102 at the individual stimulus signal frequency.
In order to facilitate the extraction of the phase and magnitude information from the reference and test signals, the test set 106 downconverts the reference and test signals from the stimulus signal frequency to an intermediate frequency of 83.33 Khz. Since the frequency downconversion is a linear process, the test signals downconverted to 83.33 Khz retain the same phase and magnitude relative to the reference signals downconverted to 83.33 Khz.
For each stimulus signal frequency, the test set 106 provides the downconverted 83.33 Khz test and reference signals to an analyzer, indicated by the reference numeral 108. The analyzer 108 analyzes the downconverted test and reference signals to extract the phase and magnitude information. It then provides to the digital processing circuitry 190, digital logic level signals containing phase and magnitude information which can be used to characterize the DUT 102 at each discrete stimulus signal frequency.
In the presently preferred embodiment, the signal source 104 can provide stimulus signals over a range of frequencies from 0.01 to 40 Ghz. The WILTRON 360SS69 available from WILTRON Company, Morgan Hill, Calif. is the signal source in the preferred embodiment. The signal source 104 is a sweeper which provides a series of unsynthesized stimulus signals over a range of frequencies for which the characteristics of the DUT 102 are to be tested.
The test set 106 includes a signal splitter 110 which receives discrete stimulus signals in the series over a desired frequency range from the signal source 104. In the preferred embodiment, the test set 106 is the 3611A available from WILTRON company. The signal splitter 110 splits each received signal into two signals having the same phase and magnitude. One of the split signals is provided on either line 112 or 118 as a reference signal, and the other split signal is applied to the DUT 102. Constituents of the split signal applied to the DUT 102 which are transmitted through it or reflected by it constitute test signals provided on lines 114 and 116. For each stimulus signal frequency, the test signals typically differ in phase or magnitude from the reference signal. This phase and magnitude difference represents information which can be used to characterize the DUT 102.
As will be more fully explained below, the splitter 110 is capable of applying stimulus signals to the DUT 102 in either a forward or a reverse direction. Thus, information can be obtained about both the forward and reverse transmission and reflection of stimulus signals by the DUT 102. When the splitter 110 applies signals to the DUT 102 in the forward direction: a reference signal r.sub.1 is provided on line 112; a reflected test signal is provided on line 114 as signal t.sub.1 ; and a transmitted test signal is provided on line 116 as signal t.sub.2. When, on the other hand, the splitter 110 provides a signal to the DUT 102 in the reverse direction: a reference signal r.sub.2 is provided to line 118; a transmitted signal is provided to line 114 as signal t.sub.1 ; and a reflected signal is provided on line 116 as signal t.sub.2.
The test set 106 includes a microwave downconverter 120 which receives mixing signals from respective first and second local oscillators 122 and 124. The downconverter 120 downconverts the respective reference and test signals from the stimulus signal frequency generated by the signal source 104 to a second intermediate frequency (IF.sub.2) of 2.25 Mhz.
The first local oscillator 122 has a frequency range of approximately 357-536.5 Mhz. The second local oscillator 124 has a frequency range of approximately of 91.65.+-.1.875 Mhz when the system is operating in a "harmonic mode", and has a frequency range of approximately 12.25-272.25 Mhz when the system is operating in a "direct mode". As explained below, the exact frequency of operation of the respective first and second local oscillators 122 and 124 depends upon the frequency of the stimulus signal provided by the source 104.
In operation, the signal source 104 typically provides a series of stimulus signals at discrete frequencies over a prescribed range of frequencies in order to characterize the DUT 102 over that prescribed frequency range. Thus, the respective frequencies of the first and second local oscillators 122 and 124 are varied such that, for each different stimulus signal frequency, the test and reference signals are downconverted to an IF.sub.2 of 2.25 Mhz.
A multiplexer/downconverter 126 receives the 2.25 Mhz reference and test signals as well as a 2.33 Mhz signal generated by a third local oscillator 128. It downconverts the 2.25 Mhz reference and test signals to a third intermediate frequency (IF.sub.3) of 83.33 Khz.
The multiplexer/downconverter 126 also selects either the reference signal r.sub.1 on line 136 or reference signal r.sub.2 on line 138 for provision to synchronous detectors 130. As explained above, at any given moment during the testing of a DUT 102, only one reference signal is provided by the splitter 110. When the splitter 110 applies signals to the DUT 102 in the forward direction, then multiplexer/downconverter 126 selects reference signal r.sub.1. When the splitter 110 applies signals to the DUT 102 in the reverse direction, then multiplexer/downconverter 126 selects reference signal r.sub.2. For each discrete stimulus signal frequency, the test set 106 can automatically switch between applying signals in the forward direction to the DUT 102 and applying signals in the reverse direction to the DUT 102.
Thus, at any moment during the testing of a DUT 102, the measurement system provides three channels: test channel t.sub.1, test channel t.sub.2 and reference channel r.sub.1, r.sub.2. In operation, as explained below, the splitter 110 can be caused to alternate between applying the stimulus signal to the DUT 102 in the forward direction and in the reverse direction. Consequently, multiplexer/downconverter 126 must be capable of alternatively coupling reference signal r.sub.1 on reference line 136 or reference signal r.sub.2 on line 138 to line 140 such that: when the splitter 110 applies the stimulus signal in the forward direction, signal r.sub.1 is provided on line 140, and when the splitter 110 provides the stimulus signal in the reverse direction, signal r.sub.2 is provided on line 140.
Gain ranging/calibration circuitry 132 receives the 83.33 Khz test and reference signals from the multiplexer/downconverter 126. During normal testing operations, this circuitry 132 amplifies these signals and provides them to the synchronous detectors 130 of the analyzer 108. The amplification of the reference and test signals ensures that they are at a high enough signal level to be accurately converted by the synchronous detectors 130 and the ADC 150.
Periodically (approximately once every two and one-half minutes in the presently preferred embodiment), in the course of the normal testing operation of the measurement system, the gain ranging/calibration circuitry 136 decouples the test and reference signals on lines 140, 142 and 144 from gain ranging amplifier assemblies (discussed below) and the amplifiers and the synchronous detectors 130, and couples the gain ranging amplifier assemblies and the synchronous detectors 130 to an 83.33 Khz calibration signal provided by a calibration oscillator 134. The calibration signal is used to calibrate a gain ranging amplifier assembly, discussed below, and to calibrate the synchronous detectors 130 to compensate for phase and magnitude drift in the test and reference signals. The manner in which this calibration is accomplished is discussed in more detail below.
The analyzer 108 incorporates the synchronous detectors 130. In the preferred embodiment, the analyzer 108 is the WILTRON Model 360 Network Analyzer available from WILTRON Company.
The synchronous detectors 130 receive the downconverted 83.33 Khz test and reference signals and an 83.33 Khz signal provided by respective fourth local oscillators 146. The synchronous detectors provide DC Real and DC Imaginary signals containing the phase and magnitude information carried by the respective test and reference signals.
A Sample/Hold (S/H) and multiplexer circuit 148 receives the DC Real and DC Imaginary signals. It parallel samples all of the signals and holds the sampled signals until they can be individually applied to an analog-to-digital converter (ADC) 150 which converts the sampled signals to digital logic levels. The digital logic level signals are provided to the processing circuitry 190 which processes the signals and produces a display illustrating the phase and magnitude information characterizing the DUT 102 over the frequency range of interest or upon further processing, displays the time domain representation of the signals.
The analyzer 108 includes a 2.25 Mhz oscillator 152 and a source lock circuit 154. The source lock circuit 154 receives on line 156 the 2.25 Mhz downconverted version of the reference signal, r.sub.1 or r.sub.2 (depending upon whether the test set 106 applies the stimulus signal to the DUT 102 in the forward or the reverse direction). At the same time, the source lock circuit 154 receives on line 158 a 2.25 Mhz signal provided by oscillator 152. In response to phase differences between these two received signals, the source lock 154 provides to the signal source 104, via line 160, a correction signal used to remove any phase drift in the stimulus signal frequency. The signal source 104, therefore, is phase-locked to a desired stimulus frequency using a downconverted 2.25 Mhz version of a reference signal, either r.sub.1 or r.sub.2.
An overview of the operation of a presently preferred embodiment of the measurement system will now be provided with reference to FIGS. 2A and 2B. The drawings of FIGS. 2A and 2B are stripped-down representations of the system. These two figures are merely intended to aid in the explanation of the reference and test signal downconversion and the source lock of the signal source using the IF.sub.2 reference signals. The drawings of these two figures are not intended to provide a detailed representation of the system.
In order to reduce the noise level of the downconverted versions of the reference and test signals, the system can operate in either a "harmonic mode" or a "direct mode". The system 100 operating in the harmonic mode is illustrated in FIG. 2A, and the system 100 operating in the direct mode is illustrated in FIG. 2B. The system 100 operates in the harmonic mode when the stimulus signal frequency is in the range of 0.2701-40 Ghz, and the system 100 operates in a direct mode when the stimulus signal frequency is in the range of 10-270 Mhz.
In FIG. 2A, the signal source 104 provides a stimulus signal in the range of 0.2701-40 Ghz, and the system 100 operates in the harmonic mode. The signal source 104 is under control of digital processing circuitry 190 via GPIB 265. The splitter 110 provides reference signals on lines 112 and 118, and it provides test signals on lines 114 and 116. The first local oscillator 122 provides a signal at a prescribed frequency in the range of 357-536.5 Mhz, via driver 168, to a harmonic generator 170. The harmonic generator, in turn, provides sampling pulses at a desired sampling rate to harmonic mixers 174. The harmonic mixers 174 sample the reference signals and the test signals, at the sampling rate. The sampled reference and test signals are thereby downconverted from the stimulus signal frequency to a first intermediate frequency (IF.sub.1) of 89.4.+-.1.875 Mhz.
The precise frequency at which the first local oscillator 122 operates is selected according to an algorithm described below. The selected frequency is chosen such that the harmonic mixers 174 sample the reference and test signals at a prescribed sampling rate so as to downconvert them to the desired first intermediate frequency (IF.sub.1).
The downconverted reference and test signals at the IF.sub.1 frequency are passed through respective drivers 176. The signals are provided to respective double balanced mixers 178 where they are mixed with a signal at a frequency in the range of 91.65.+-.1.875 Mhz provided by the second local oscillator 124. The precise frequency of the signal provided by the second local oscillator 124 also is chosen in accordance with the algorithm described below. The respective double balanced mixers 178 output, onto lines 135 and 137 the test signals downconverted to the second intermediate frequency (IF.sub.2) of 2.25 Mhz and onto lines 136 and 138 the reference signals downconverted to 2.25 Mhz.
During normal test measurement operation, test signal t.sub.2 on line 137 is provided to image reject mixer 179. Switch 180 couples the test signal t.sub.1 on 135 to image reject mixer 183. Switches 182 and 184 operate in unison to couple either reference signal r.sub.1 on line 136 or r.sub.2 on line 138 to image reject mixer 185 and to the source lock 154. When the splitter 110 applies signals to the DUT 102 in the forward direction, reference signal r.sub.1, is coupled to image reject mixer 185 and to the source lock 154, and when the splitter 110 applies signals to the DUT 102 in the reverse direction, reference signal r.sub.2 is so coupled. Thus, the switch positions of switches 182 and 184 depend upon the operation of the splitter 110.
The respective 2.25 Mhz test signals t.sub.1 and t.sub.2 are provided, via respective drivers 187, to image reject mixers 179 and 183 which mix them with a 2.33 Mhz signal provided by the third local oscillator 128 and which output versions of the test signals downconverted to 83.33 Khz.
As explained above, switch 182 couples either reference signal r.sub.1, or r.sub.2 to image reject mixer 185. The coupled reference signal is provided to image reject mixer 185 via a respective driver 187. The image reject mixer 185 mixes the selected 2.25 Mhz reference signal with the 2.33 Mhz signal provided by the third local oscillator 128 and outputs the coupled reference signal downconverted to 83.33 Khz.
The 83.33 Khz reference and test signals are respectively provided, via variable driver assemblies 177, to the synchronous detectors 130 wherein they are mixed with an 83.33 Khz signal produced by respective fourth local oscillators 146. The resultant DC Real and DC Imaginary reference and test signals are provided to sample and hold (S/H) circuitry 148-1.
DC Real and DC Imaginary signals stored by the S/H circuitry 148-1 are serially provided, via multiplexer 148-2, to ADC 150. The ADC 150 provides digital logic level signals to digital processing circuitry 190.
In the course of the downconversion of the stimulus signal, the reference signal downconverted to the IF.sub.2 frequency, is used to generate a signal on line 156 which is provided to the source lock 154. At the same time, oscillator 152 provides a 2.25 Mhz signal to the source lock 154. The source lock 154, in turn; feeds back the correction signal, via line 160, to the signal source 104 to correct any drift in the signal source 104. Thus, the signal source 104 is phase-locked to a desired stimulus frequency using the IF.sub.2 reference signal and the 2.25 Mhz signal provided by oscillator 152.
In FIG. 2B, the signal source 104 provides a stimulus signal in the range of 10-270 Mhz, and the system operates in the direct mode. One difference in the operation of the system in the direct mode from its operation in the harmonic mode is that, in the direct mode, the respective harmonic mixers 174 are bypassed such that the reference and test signals pass through substantially unaffected. Thus, the reference and test signals are conducted at the stimulus signal frequency directly to the respective double balanced mixers 178. Another difference is that the second local oscillator 124, in the direct mode, operates in a frequency range of 12.25-272.25 Mhz. The exact frequency at which the second local oscillator 124 operates is selected according to an algorithm discussed below. In all other significant respects, the operation of the system in the direct mode is substantially the same as its operation in the harmonic mode.
The use of both a harmonic mode and a direct mode improves the noise performance of the system 100 over the broad stimulus signal frequency range of 0.01-40 Ghz. More specifically, it is well known that system noise increases with harmonic number. By incorporating a first local oscillator 122 which, in the harmonic mode, operates in the range of 357-536.5 Mhz, the largest number harmonic of the system is 75 (536.5 Mhz.times.75=40 Ghz). Relatively speaking, 75 is a low harmonic number, and therefore, system noise is reduced. Thus, by using a relatively large high-end frequency (536.5 Mhz) for the first local oscillator 122, the largest harmonic number of the system, as well as system noise, are reduced.
In order to further reduce system noise, the first local oscillator 122 not only uses a relatively large high-end frequency (536.5 Mhz), but also itself operates with relatively low noise. Low noise operation of the first local oscillator 122 is important because any noise carried by its signal is multiplied by the harmonic generator 170. In order to reduce the noise level of signals produced by the first local oscillator 122, a relatively narrow frequency range (357-536.5 Mhz) is used so as to make the oscillator more resistant to noise in the tuning voltage used to tune the oscillator. Since the stimulus signal frequency range extends below the low end (357 Mhz) of the first local oscillator's frequency range, the system bypasses the harmonic mixers 174 and operates in the direct mode when the stimulus signal is in a relatively lower frequency range (10-270 Mhz).
Referring to FIGS. 3A and 3B, there are shown additional details of the system 100. FIG. 3A illustrates further details of the test set 106 which includes the first and second local oscillators 122 and 124. It also includes switches 180, 182 and 183 as well as limiter 522 shown within dashed lines 524. Furthermore, the test set 106 includes a digital interface 526 to analyzer 108.
The first local oscillator 122 includes a 357-536.5 Mhz voltage tuned oscillator (VTO) 254, tuning voltage summation circuit (TVS-1) 260 and digital-to-analog converter 266. Additional features of the first local oscillator 122 are described below.
The second local oscillator 124 includes a 98-272.5 Mhz VTO 316, tuning voltage summation circuit (TVS-2) 334, digital-to-analog converter 338, and ".div.L" components. Additional features of the second local oscillator 124 are described below.
FIG. 3B illustrates details of the the analyzer 108 which includes a plurality of microprocessors in its digital processing circuitry 190. I/O processor 190-1 comprises an 8088 microprocessor produced by Intel Corp. which has a place of business in Sunnyvale, Calif. A first main processor 190-2A comprises an 8088 microprocessor, and a first math co-processor 190-2B comprises an Intel 8087 math co-processor. A second main processor 190-3A comprises an 8088 microprocessor, and a second math co-processor 190-3B comprises an Intel 8087 math co-processor.
The I/O processor 190-1 and the first main processor 190-2A are coupled to engage in two-way digital communication via FIFO circuitry 528. The first main processor 190-2A and the second main processor 190-3A are coupled to engage in two-way digital communication via FIFO circuitry 530.
The I/O processor 190-1 is coupled to the signal source 104 via the GPIB 265. Optionally, the I/O processor 190-1 also can be coupled to a plotter 532 via the GPIB 265.
The I/O processor 190-1 is coupled to a test set I/O circuit 534 via bus 269. The test set I/O circuit 534, which is part of the analyzer 108, is coupled to the digital interface 526, which is part of the test set 106.
The digital interface 526 is coupled to provide control signals, via I/O bus 267, to components of the test set 106 such as the splitter 110, digital-to-analog converters 266 and 338, the gain ranging amplifier assemblies 177 and the harmonic mixers 174. Thus, the I/O processor 190-1, in effect, controls the operation of the test set 106.
The analyzer 108 includes a 10 Mhz crystal controlled reference oscillator 536 which provides 10 Mhz reference signals to the third local oscillator 128 and the calibration oscillator 134, to the source lock 154 and to phase lock circuits 252 and 314. The reference oscillator also provides 10 Mhz signals to the synchronous detectors 130.
The system 100 can operate in either a sweeper mode in which the signal source 104 is an unsynthesized sweeper or in a synthesizer mode in which a synthesizer is substituted for the sweeper. A phase lock mode control 539 receives control signals from the source lock 154 and phase lock circuit 314. When the system 100 is in a sweeper mode, the mode control 539 provides the source lock control signal to the signal source 104 and provides the control signal from phase lock circuit 314 to the second local oscillator 124. When the system 100 is in the synthesizer mode, the mode control 539 provides the source lock control signal to the second local oscillator 124. Thus, in the sweeper mode, the signal source 104 is phase locked to the IF.sub.2 reference, and in the synthesizer mode the second local oscillator 124 is phased locked to the IF.sub.2 reference.
IF synchronization control circuitry 520 provides an absolute phase reference for the system 100. Circuitry 520 receives 10 Mhz signals generated by the crystal controlled reference signal generator 536. Circuitry 520 provides IF synchronization signals on line 541. It also provides to switching power supply 540, via line 538, signals which place the side bands of the switching power supply signals at approximately 55 Khz and 111 Khz, equally spaced on either side of the 83.33 Khz reference and test signals. The switching power supply 540, therefore, is injection locked by signals provided on line 538 to a frequency which does not interfere with measurements by the system 100.
The first main processor 190-2A is interfaced to a disk drive 542 and to a programmable module 544. A software operating system can be booted-up either from the disk drive 542 or the module 544.
The second main processor 190-3A is interfaced to a parallel printer 542, to a front panel 552, to the GPIB 265 and to a graphics control processor 544. The graphics control processor 546 in turn, is interfaced to an RGB (Red-Green-Blue) monitor 548.
The system 100 can buffer data to be printed. Therefore, the parallel printer 542 can print while the second main processor 190-3A is engaged in other processing.
A user can control the system 100 through the front panel 552. The user can monitor system measurements through the RGB monitor 548.
Referring to the illustrative drawings of FIG. 4, there are shown details of the splitter 110. The splitter 110 includes first and second splitter circuits 198 and 200 which can be individually coupled to receive the stimulus signal from the signal source 104. PIN diode switches 202 couple either splitter circuit 198 or 200 to the signal source. The test set also includes respective first and second couplers 204 and 206. Coupler 206 is asymmetrically coupled, as described below, in order to increase the dynamic range of scattering parameter S.sub.21 in the forward direction Details of the first and second couplers are provided in co-pending commonly assigned Patent Application entitled DIRECTIONAL COUPLER AND TERMINATION FOR STRIPLINE AND COAXIAL CONDUCTORS, invented by William W. Oldfield, et al., Ser. No. 176,100, now U.S. Pat. No. 5,047,737, which was filed on the same date as this Application and which is hereby incorporated herein in its entirety by this reference.
The first splitter circuit 198, when coupled to receive the stimulus signal, splits that signal using two 50 ohm loads 208. A first one of the two split signals is provided on line 112 as reference signal r.sub.1. A second one of the two split signals is provided to the through-arm of the first coupler 204.
The second splitter circuit 200, when coupled to receive the stimulus signal, splits that stimulus signal using two 50 ohm loads 212. A first one of those two split signals is provided on line 118 as reference signal r.sub.2. A second one of those two split signals is provided to the coupling-arm of the second coupler 206.
Respective through-arms of couplers 204 and 206 are connected to the DUT 102 through Ports I and II, respectively. The coupling-arm of the first coupler 204 provides test signals on line 114 as described below, and the through-arm of the second coupler 206 provides test signals on line 116 as described below.
In operation, the test set 106 is used to generate reference and test signals used to calculate the "Scattering Parameters" for the DUT 102. The Forward Scattering Parameters are generated by connecting the first splitter circuit 198 to receive the stimulus signals. The first split signals are provided on line 112 as reference signal r.sub.1. The second split signals provided to the through-arm of the first coupler 204 are conducted through Port I to the DUT 102. Forward Transmission test signals are transmitted through the DUT 102 and through Port II to the through-arm of the second coupler. The Forward Transmission test signals are provided, via the through-arm of the second coupler 206, as test signal t.sub.2 on line 116. Forward Reflection test signals are reflected by the DUT 102 back through Port I. The Forward Reflection test signals are conducted, via the coupling-arm of the first coupler 204, to line 114 as test signal t.sub.1.
The Forward Scattering Parameters are represented by the following equations. In these equations, S.sub.21 represents the Forward Transmission Scattering Parameter, and S.sub.11 represents the Forward Reflection Scattering Parameter.
S.sub.21 t.sub.2 /r.sub.1 (1)
S.sub.11 t.sub.1 /r.sub.1 (2)
Reverse Scattering Parameters are generated by connecting the second splitter circuit 200 to receive the stimulus signals. The first split signal is provided on line 118 as reference signal r.sub.2. The second split signals provided to the coupling-arm of the second coupler 206 are conducted, via Port II, to the DUT 102. The Reverse Transmission test signals are coupled to the coupling-arm of the first coupler 204 and are provided on line 114 as test signal t.sub.. The Reverse Reflection test signals are reflected by the DUT 102 back through Port II and travel, via through-arm of the second coupler 206, to line 116 where they are provided as test signal t.sub.2.
The Reverse Scattering Parameters are represented by the following equations. In these equations, S.sub.12 represents the Reverse Transmission Scattering Parameter, and S.sub.22 represents the Reverse Reflection Scattering Parameter.
S.sub.12 t.sub.1 /r.sub.2 (3)
S.sub.22 t.sub.2 /r.sub.2 (4)
It will be appreciated that the first and second couplers 204 and 206 are not identically coupled to the respective first and second splitter circuits 198 and 200. The first coupler 204 is coupled by its through-arm to the first splitter 198; whereas the second coupler 206 is coupled by its coupling-arm to the second splitter 200. The result is that the Forward Transmission test signals provided on line 116 as test signals t.sub.2 suffer significantly less loss than do the Reverse Transmission test signals provided on line 114 as test signals t.sub.1. In the preferred embodiment, the Forward Transmission test signals suffer only approximately a 7 dB loss; whereas the Reverse Transmission test signals suffer approximately a 26 dB loss. Since the Forward Transmission test signals generally are of greater interest to users than are the Reverse Transmission test signals, this asymmetrical coupling of couplers 204 and 206 advantageously ensures that the more desirable Forward Transmission test signals are transmitted with less loss.
Details of the splitter 110 are described further in co-pending commonly assigned patent application entitled, ASYMMETRICAL COUPLING CIRCUIT, invented by Martin I. Grace, Ser. No. 175,956, now U.S. Pat. No. 4,808,913 filed on the same date as this Application and which is hereby incorporated herein in its entirety by this reference.
Referring to the illustrative drawings of FIG. 5, there are shown details of one of the harmonic mixers 174 of the preferred embodiment. Each of the harmonic mixers of the embodiment are substantially identical. The harmonic mixer 174 receives from the splitter 110 signals at the stimulus signal frequency. Sampling signal pulses generated at the sampling rate are provided to the dual slotline 220. The harmonic mixer 174 includes two 0.5 pf capacitors 224, two 100 ohm resistors 226, two 1 nF capacitors 242 as well as a 50 ohm resistor 228 and a 47k ohm resistor 229. The harmonic mixer also includes a tuneable one microhenry inductor 230 as well as two 2.7 nf capacitors 232 and respective 16k ohm resistors 234 and 236, a 100k ohm resistor 238 and a 1k ohm resistor 239.
The sampling signal pulses generated by the harmonic generator 170 are provided to a power splitter (not shown). Each of the two split sampling signal pulses then is provided to the dual slotline 220. Details of the dual slotline 220 and the manner in which stimulus frequency signals are provided to the dual slotline 220 are set forth in co-pending commonly assigned Patent Application, entitled DUAL SLOTLINE FEED, invented by W. Moberg, Ser. No. 176,098, now abandoned, filed on the same date as this Application and which is hereby incorporated herein in its entirety by this reference.
In operation, each respective sampling signal pulse causes respective diodes 240 to momentarily turn ON resulting in sampling of the signal provided by the splitter 110 at the stimulus signal frequency. The sampled signal is provided, via bypass capacitors 242 to the gate of FET 244. The output signal at the IF.sub.1 frequency of 89.4.+-.1.875 Mhz is provided on the drain terminal of the FET 244 to a driver 176 and then to a 2.25 Mhz notch filter 248. The notch filter 248 blocks spurious signals at the IF.sub.2 so that such signals are not propagated to double balance mixer 178. Mixer 178 provides signals at IF.sub.2 to bandpass filter 249.
During operation in the harmonic mode, voltages V.sub.1 and V.sub.3 are allowed to float so that diodes 240 are self-biasing. Voltage V.sub.2 is +15 volts which turns ON PIN diode 250. The PIN diode 250, when turned ON, couples inductor 230 to the harmonic mixer 174. The inductor 230 ensures that the harmonic mixer has a frequency passband at the IF.sub.1 of 89.4.+-.1.875 Mhz. It should be noted that the IF.sub.1 frequency is selected so as to provide continuous frequency coverage in the harmonic mode for the entire range of stimulus signal frequencies in that mode.
FIG. 5A illustrates the nature of the harmonic mixer 174 in the harmonic mode. The 3 pF capacitance is due to capacitors 224, 242 and to stray capacitance. The 5.4 nF capacitance is due to capacitors 232. The resistance R.sub.D of 8k ohms is due to diodes 240.
FIG. 5B illustrates the filter behavior of the harmonic mixer 174 in the harmonic mode. The frequency of 89.4 Mhz is in the passband, and the frequency of 2.25 Mhz is rejected.
During operation in the harmonic mode, when one of the respective harmonic mixers 174 is receiving low level signals, it is sometimes necessary to shut OFF another one of the harmonic mixers 174. The shutting OFF is referred to as "blanking". Blanking is accomplished by providing V.sub.1 =+2.5 v. and V.sub.3 =-2.5 v. Details of the blanking operation are provided in co-pending commonly assigned Patent Application entitled REFLECTED SIGNAL MEASUREMENT BLANKING CIRCUIT, invented by Glenn Ewart, Ser. No. 176,099, now U.S. Pat. No. 4,896,096 filed on the same day as this Application and which is hereby incorporated herein in its entirety by this reference.
During operation in the direct mode, voltage V.sub.1 is -15 volts, and voltage V.sub.3 is +15 volts. Thus, diodes 240 are permanently turned ON in the direct mode allowing signals provided by the splitter 110 at the stimulus signal frequency to be transmitted through the harmonic mixer 174 without being downconverted through sampling. Voltage V.sub.2 is set to 0 volts so as to turn OFF PIN diode 250. Thus, in the direct mode, the inductor 230 is effectively decoupled from the harmonic mixer 174. As a result, the passband of the harmonic mixer in the direct mode is wide enough to accommodate all signals in the stimulus signal frequency range (10-270 Mhz) in that mode.
FIG. 6 illustrates details of the first local oscillator 122. FIG. 7 illustrates details of the phase lock circuit 252 used to control the frequency of operation of the first local oscillator 122.
The first local oscillator 122 includes a voltage tuned oscillator 254 which provides on line 256 signals in the frequency range 357-536.5 Mhz, and which receives on line 258 tuning voltage signals which tune the oscillator to a desired precise frequency of operation within that range.
The first local oscillator 122 includes tuning voltage summation circuit (TVS-1) 260 which receives on line 262 fine frequency steering signals from the phase lock control circuit 252. The TVS-1 260 receives on line 264 coarse frequency steering signals from eight bit digital-to-analog converter 266. The coarse steering signals provided by the digital-to-analog converter 266 are controlled by signals provided by the I/O processor 190-1, via I/O bus 269.
The tuning voltage signals generated by TVS-1 260 are provided to a 100 Khz, 150 Khz notch filter 268 used to remove sidebands caused by fractional M division explained below. The filtered signals are provided to a linearizer circuit 270 to obtain a linear frequency versus voltage tuning signal. The linearizer circuit 270, in turn, provides the linearized tuning voltage signals, via line 258, to the voltage tuned oscillator 254.
Window compare circuitry 271 receives the fine frequency steering signals on line 262 and provides signals to the I/O processor 190-1 used for diagnostics. The coarse frequency steering signals on line 264 are provided as signal V.sub..phi.DET to the phase lock circuit 252 as explained below.
Signal V.sub..phi.DET varies within the voltage range of 0 to 12 volts. When V.sub..phi.DET is at 0 volts then frequency F.sub.LO1 (the frequency of operation of the first local oscillator 122) is at its lowest, and when V.sub..phi.DET is 12 volts then frequency F.sub.LO1 is at its highest.
The phase lock control circuit 252 includes loop gain compensation control circuitry 272 which receives the V.sub..phi.DET Signal. The circuitry 272 also receives a biasing voltage to provide nominal gain even when V.sub..phi.DET is at 0 volts. The loop gain compensation control circuitry 272 provides on line 276 signals which maintain a constant loop gain in the phase lock circuit 252 despite variations in the divisor M discussed below.
A phase detector 278 receives the signals provided on line 276 by the loop gain compensation control circuitry 272. It also receives 0.5 Mhz signals provided on line 282 by divide-by-twenty circuit 284. The divide-by-twenty circuit 284 receives the 10 Mhz crystal controlled reference signal on line 285. Finally, the phase detector 278 receives on line 286 signals provided by divide-by-M circuitry 288.
The divide-by-M circuitry 288 receives on line 290 signals at the precise frequency of operation of the first local oscillator 122. These signals are provided by the first local oscillator 122, via driver 306. The value of M ranges from 714.0 to 1073.0. The resolution of the divide-by-M circuitry 288 is 50 Khz. In order to achieve this resolution with minimal lock-up time, the circuitry 288 includes a fractional frequency divider described in co-pending commonly assigned Patent Application, entitled DUAL MODULUS FRACTIONAL DIVIDER, invented by Donald A. Bradley, Ser. No. 175,759, filed on the same date as this Application which is hereby incorporated herein in its entirety by this reference. Lock-up time, of course, is the time necessary to achieve phase lock. It will be appreciated that (714.0).times.(0.5 Mhz)=357 Mhz, and that (1073.0).times.(0.5 Mhz)=536.5 Mhz.
The phase detector 278 provides phase correction signals to loop amplifier 292. The loop amplifier, in turn, provides these signals, to a 50 Khz notch filter 294 used to remove sidebands caused by fractional M division. The filtered signals are provided to line 262.
The phase detector 278 provides to lock detector 296 signals which indicate when phase lock has been achieved. The lock detector 296 provides signals to the I/O processor 190-1 to indicate when phase lock has been achieved and data measurements can be taken. The signals provided on line 290 to the divide-by-M circuitry 288 also are provided to a level detector 298. The level detector indicates to the I/O processor whether there is sufficient signal amplitude provided on line 290 to accurately achieve locking.
The first local oscillator 122 provides, via driver 168, signals on line 302 at a prescribed frequency in the range 357-536.5 Mhz. These signals are provided to the harmonic generator 170. Switch 304 is closed in the harmonic mode and is opened in the direct mode. Thus, in the direct mode, the first local oscillator 122 provides no signals to the harmonic generator 170.
FIG. 8 illustrates details of the harmonic generator 170. Signals are provided by the first local oscillator 122 on line 302. These signals are amplified by drivers 306 and are provided, via inductor 308, to the step recovery diode (SRD) 310. The output of the harmonic generator 170 comprises sampling signals provided at the sampling rate to the harmonic mixers 174 as explained above with reference FIG. 5. The operation of a harmonic generator such as that illustrated in FIG. 8 is well-known to those skilled in the art and need not be described in detail herein.
FIG. 9 illustrates details of the second local oscillator 124. FIG. 10 illustrates details of the phase lock circuit 314 used to control the frequency of operation of the second local oscillator 124.
The second local oscillator 124 includes a voltage tuned oscillator 316 having a range of operation of 98-272.5 Mhz. The output frequency of oscillator 316 is provided both to line 318 and to a first divide-by-two circuit 319. The output frequency of the first divide-by-two circuit 319 is provided both to line 320 and to a second divide-by-two circuit 322. The output frequency of the second divide-by-two circuit 322 is provided both to line 324 and to a third divide-by-two circuit 326. The output frequency of the third divide-by-two circuit is provided to line 328. Switch 330 selects among the signals provided on lines 318, 320, 324, and 328 and provides the selected signal, via respective drivers 332 to the respective double balance mixers 178.
The second local oscillator 124 includes a tuning voltage summation circuit (TVS-2) 334 which receives on line 336 coarse frequency steering signals from eight bit digital-to-analog converter 338. The coarse steering signals provided by the digital-to-analog converter 338 are controlled by signals provided by the I/O processor 190-1, via I/O bus 267.
TVS-2 334 receives on line 340 fine frequency steering signals from loop gain control circuitry 342. These signals compensate for variations in loop gain caused by the ".div.L" components when the source lock 154 provides control signals to the second local oscillator 124 instead of to the signal source 104. The loop gain control circuitry 342 receives on line 344 phase correction signals provided by the phase lock circuit 314 as explained below.
The TVS-2 provides voltage tuning signals on line 346 to a linearizer 348 which provides a linear frequency versus voltage tuning signal to the voltage tuned oscillator 316. Furthermore, window compare circuitry 350 receives the fine frequency steering signal on line 344 and provides diagnostic signals to the I/O processor 190-1. Finally, the coarse frequency steering signals on line 336 are provided as signal v.sub..phi.DET to the phase lock circuit 314 as explained below.
The phase lock circuit 314 includes loop gain compensation control circuitry 352 which receives the v.sub..phi.DET signal. The circuitry 352 also receives a biasing voltage used to provide nominal gain even when V.sub..phi.DET is at 0 volts. The loop gain compensation control circuitry 352 provides on line 356 signals which maintain a constant loop gain in the phase lock control circuit 314 despite variations in the divisor K discussed below.
A phase detector 358 receives the signals provided on line 356 by loop gain compensation control circuitry 352. It also receives 0.5 Mhz signals provided on line 360 by divide-by-twenty circuit 362. The divide-by-twenty circuit 362 receives the 10 Mhz crystal controlled reference signals on line 364. Finally, the phase detector 358 receives on line 366 signals provided by divide-by-K circuitry 368.
The divide-by-K circuitry 368 receives on line 370 signals provided on line 370 by the voltage tuned oscillator 316 via driver 372. The value of K ranges from the 196.0-544.5. The resolution of the divide-by-K circuitry 368 is 50 Khz. In order to achieve this resolution and to achieve rapid phase-lock of the second local oscillator 124, a fractional frequency divider described in the above-referenced co-pending application is included in the divide-by-K circuitry 368.
The phase detector 358 provides phase correction signals to loop amplifier 374. The loop amplifier, in turn, provides the signals, via 50 Khz notch filter 376, to the loop gain control circuitry 342 of the second local oscillator 124. The 50 Khz notch filter 376 removes sidebands caused by fractional K division.
The phase detector 358 provides to lock detector 373 signals which indicate when phase lock has been achieved. The lock detector 373 provides signals to the I/O processor 190-1 indicating when the second local oscillator 124 is in phase lock and test measurements can be taken. The signals provided on line 370 are provided to a level detector 371. The level detector 371 provides diagnostic signals to the I/O processor 190-1.
Switch 377 alternatively couples line 344 to the phase lock circuit 314 or to TVS-4 502 discussed below in relation to FIG. 14. Switch 377 couples line 344 to TVS-4 when the source lock 154 is to be coupled to the second local oscillator 124 instead of to the signal source 104.
This alternative coupling, for example, is used in the synthesizer mode when a synthesized signal source (not shown) is incorporated in the system 100. The phase lock of the IF.sub.2 to the 2.25 Mhz synthesized reference frequency reduces measurement noise regardless of whether the signal source 104 or the second local oscillator 124 is controlled.
It will be appreciated that an important advantage of the system 100 is that it permits the use of an unsynthesized signal source 104. This particular advantage is gained by using the source lock 154 to phase lock the signal source 104 to an IF.sub.2 reference signal. Typically, an unsynthesized signal source 104 is significantly less expensive than a synthesized source. Furthermore, the system 100 permits the use of an unsynthesized signal source 104 without suffering a degradation in stimulus signal frequency accuracy.
FIG. 11 illustrates details of image reject mixer 183 and its associated variable driver assembly 177. It will be appreciated that the image reject mixers indicated by reference numerals 179 and 185 are substantially identical to that illustrated in FIG. 11.
The image reject mixer 183 is operable in either a test mode or a calibration mode. In the test mode, downconverted versions of the test signal t.sub.1 at the IF.sub.2 of 2.25 Mhz are received by driver 176 and are provided to 2 Mhz bandpass filter 382 centered at 2.25 Mhz. The filtered IF.sub.2 signal is split in order to allow for quadrature phasing at IF.sub.2 of the split signals as follows. One split signal is provided to a -45.degree. phase shifter 384, and the other split signal is provided to +45.degree. phase shifter 386. The respective phase shifted signals are provided to respective double balanced mixers 388 and 390 where they are mixed with the 2.33 Mhz signal provided on line 392 by the third local oscillator 128. The mixed signal output by mixer 388 is provided to +45.degree. phase shifter 389, and the mixed signal output by mixer 390 is provided to -45.degree. phase shifter 391. The resulting signals are provided to summation circuit 394 which, in turn, provides their sum to 10 Khz bandpass filter 396 centered at 83.33 Khz.
Thus, in test mode the image reject mixer 183 downconverts the IF.sub.2 signal to a third intermediate frequency (IF.sub.3) of 83.33 Khz. The 83.33 Khz signal is provided to a gain ranging amplifier assembly 177 which comprises a series of five individual drivers. These drivers can be set by control signals provided on lines 398 by the I/O processor 190-1 to individually provide gain of either one or four. Consequently, a variable gain is provided to signals output by the double balance mixer 183 for provision to a synchronous detector 130. Peak detector 400 monitors the peak amplitude of the signals output by the gain ranging amplifier assembly 177. Window detector 402 provides to the I/O processor 190-1 signals indicating when the signals on line 399 are within a desired signal level suitable for provision to the synchronous detector 130.
In the calibration mode, switches 404 and 406 couple line 392 directly to bandpass filter 396, and the calibration oscillator 134 provides on line 392 calibration signals at 83.33 Khz as explained below. In the calibration mode, the 83.33 Khz signal provided by the calibration oscillator 134 is used to calibrate the gain ranging amplifiers 177 and the synchronous detectors 130.
Calibration occurs approximately once every two and one-half minutes. During calibration, the ADC 150 is calibrated using a precision DC reference (not shown). The gain and phase shifts experienced by a signal propagated through the gain ranging amplifier assembly 177 due to gain settings of one and four are determined and stored in memory. Also, circularity errors in the synchronous detectors 130 are identified and stored in memory. The stored errors are used later to correct measurement data.
FIG. 12 illustrates details of the calibration oscillator 134 and the third local oscillator 128. The third local oscillator 128 receives the 10 Mhz crystal control reference signal on line 404. The divide-by-fifteen circuit 406 downconverts the 10 Mhz signal to the 666 Khz. The downconverted 666 Khz signal is provided to phase detector 408. Divide-by-fourteen circuit 410 receives an input from 9.33 Mhz voltage tuned oscillator (VTO) 412 and provides an output signal at approximately 666 Khz to the phase detector 408. The phase detector 408 provides an output to loop amplifier 414 which, in turn, provides an amplified voltage tuning signal to the 9.33 Mhz VTO 412. The phase detector also provides a signal to lock detector 416 which, in turn, indicates to the I/O processor 190-1 when the third local oscillator 128 is phase locked and measurements can be taken.
The 9.33 Mhz VTO 412 provides its output signal both to the divide-by-fourteen circuit 410 and to a divide-by-four circuit 418. The output of the divide-by-four circuit 418 is provided to a 3 Mhz low-pass filter 420. Thus, at terminal 422 a 2.33 Mhz signal is provided by the third local oscillator 128.
A byte provided on bus 269 to divide-by-one hundred and twenty circuit 271 indicates the phase of the 83.33 Khz calibration signal relative to the IF synchronization signal provided on line 541 by the IF synchronization circuitry 520. A sine look-up table 275 converts the signals provided by the circuit 271 to a series of pulses which, in turn, are converted by digital-to-analog converter 277 to an 83.33 Khz sine wave. Filter 279 provides filtering to the 83.33 Khz calibration signal on terminal 424.
Switch 426 can be used to select between terminals 422 and 424. When terminal 422 is selected, the 2.33 Mhz signal provided by the third local oscillator 128 is provided on line 392 and when terminal 424 is selected, the 83.33 Khz signal provided by the calibration oscillator 134 is provided on line 392.
FIG. 13 illustrates details of a respective fourth local oscillator 146 and the details of one of the three synchronous detectors 130 and two of the six sample/hold circuits 148-1. In operation, divide-by-one hundred and twenty circuit 428 receives the 10 Mhz crystal controlled reference signals on line 430. The circuit 428 receives on bus 269 a control byte from the I/O processor 190-1 which indicates the phase of the output signal of the oscillator relative to the IF synchronization signal. The circuit 428 also receives the IF synchronization signal. The circuit 428 provides on lines 432 a digital representation of a 83.33 Khz signal.
The synchronous detector 130 includes a respective sine look-up table 436 and a respective cosine look-up table 438 which respectively receive the digital signal representation provided by the divide-by-one hundred and twenty circuit 428. The respective sine and cosine look-up tables 436 and 438 respectively provide digital sine and cosine representations of the 83.33 Khz signal to respective digital-to-analog converters and eight bit multiplier circuits 440 and 442.
Circuit 440 converts the signals provided by sine look-up table 436 from digital to analog. Circuit 442 converts the signals provided to it by cosine look-up table 438 from digital to analog. Circuit 440 multiplies the analog versions of the signals provided by the sine look-up table 436 with 83.33 Khz signals provided on line 399. Circuit 442 multiplies the analog versions of the signals provided by the cosine look-up table 438 with the 83.33 Khz signals provided on line 399.
The output of circuit 440 is provided to the 100 Khz low-pass filter 444. The output of filter 444 represents the "Real" (or in-phase) component of the signal on line 399.
The output of circuit 442 is provided to 100 Khz low-pass filter 446. The output of filter 446 represents the "Imaginary" (or quadrature) component of the signal on line 399.
The respective outputs of filters 444 and 446 are provided, via respective drivers 448, to sample-and-hold circuits 148-1. The I/O processor 190-1 controls the operation of the sample-and-hold circuits 148-1 using control signals provided on lines 450. Sampling of the Real and Imaginary components by all three channels occurs simultaneously. The simultaneous sampling advantageously preserves the correlated noise on the channels which is normalized out during S-parameter display.
The respective outputs of the filters 444 and 446 can undergo additional filtering to remove noise using either respective 1 Khz filters 452 or using respective 100 hz filters 454. Alternatively, the outputs of respective filters 444 and 446 can be provided directly to respective drivers 448 without further filtering. The selection of the respective filters 452 and 454 is provided by the front panel 552.
Filters 444, 446 and 452, 454 advantageously filter out noise in the downconverted signals outside the filter bandwidths without the need for involvement of the processors 190-1, 190-2 or 190-3. More specifically, the filters can be used to filter out noise without the need to take a relatively large number of stimulus signal measurements and then average the results, using the processors, in order to reduce noise. Thus, the processor is free to undertake other tasks, and in fact, the settling time of filters 444, 446 and 452, 454 is short enough such that accurate measurements often can be taken more rapidly using such filtering than if the processors were involved in calculating average measurement values in order to remove noise. Optionally, of course, the processors (instead of the filters) can be used to remove such noise or the two can be used together for even greater noise reduction.
In the preferred embodiment, the use of the 1 Khz filters 452 results in a sampling time of approximately 2.1 msec for each discrete stimulus signal frequency, and use of filters 454 results in a sampling time of approximately 11.1 msec. Whereas, use of neither filters 452 nor 454 results in a sampling time of approximately 1.1 msec. The additional sampling time incurred by using either filters 452 or 454 is due to an increased settling time for narrower bandwidth filters.
It will be appreciated that the discussion with respect to FIG. 13 applies to each and every one of the synchronous detectors 130.
In operation, for each stimulus signal frequency, the Real and Imaginary signal levels are adjusted prior to their actual measurement so as to obtain maximum resolution from the ADC 150. For each stimulus signal frequency tested and for each channel, the I/O microprocessor 190-1 first determines that the first and second local oscillators 122 and 124 and the signal source 104 are phase locked. Then it increases or decreases the gain provided by the gain ranging amplifier assemblies 177 as needed to maintain the downconverted signals on each of the three respective channels within the desired limits of the window detectors 402. For each of the three channels, once proper signal magnitude has been achieved by increasing or decreasing the gain, the I/O processor 190-1 measures the Real and Imaginary outputs of the channel's synchronous detector 130 and increases or decreases the phase byte provided on bus 269 so as to make the Real and the Imaginary signals equal and positive. This assures that the signal magnitude will be maximized for both the Real and the Imaginary signals. The adjustments just described minimize quantization error in Real and Imaginary signals on each of the three channels converted by the ADC 150.
FIG. 14 illustrates details of the source lock circuitry 154. Divide-by-ten circuit 456 receives the 10 Mhz reference signals. Circuit 456, in turn, provides 1 Mhz signals to phase detector 458. Divide-by-nine circuit 460 receives signals from 9 Mhz voltage tuned oscillator (VT0) 462, and provides 1 Mhz signals to the phase detector 458. The phase detector 458 provides a correction signal to a loop amplifier 464 which, in turn, provides an amplified tuning voltage signal to the 9 Mhz VTO. The phase detector 458 also provides a signal to lock detector 466 which provides a lock detection signal to the I/O processor 190-1.
The 9 Mhz VTO 462 provides to divide-by-four and phase shifting circuit 468 its output at the 9 Mhz frequency. Circuit 468 provides on line 470 a 2.25 Mhz signal with 0.degree. phase shift and provides on line 472 a 2.25 Mhz signal with a 90.degree. phase shift. The signal on line 470 is provided to double balanced mixer 474 which mixes it with an IF.sub.2 reference signal. Similarly, the signal on line 472 is provided to double balanced mixer 476 which mixes it with an IF.sub.2 reference signal.
The output of mixer 474 is used to generate the correction signal provided on line 160 to the signal source 104. The output of mixer 476 is used to detect when the IF.sub.2 reference signal is in phase lock with the signal provided on line 472.
The output of mixer 476 is provided to 3 Mhz low-pass filter 478. The output of filter 478 is provided to inverter 480 and to line 481. Switch 482 is preset by the I/O processor 190-1 to couple a positive polarity signal to the positive terminal of comparator 484 upon achieving phase lock with IF.sub.2.
Table 1 indicates the position of switch 482 over various frequency ranges.
TABLE 1______________________________________Terminal Frequency Range______________________________________(+) 110-270 Mhz(-) 270.1-447 Mhz(+) 447.1-626 Mhz(-) 0.6261-40 Ghz______________________________________
Upon the achievement of phase-lock with IF.sub.2 the comparator 484 provides a signal on line 486 causing switches 488 and 490 to open. Thus, upon achieving phase lock, the first and second integrators 492 and 494 are incorporated into the feedback path of the correction signal provided on line 160. The signal source 104 in conjunction with the first and second integrators 492 and 494 form a third order loop. Optionally, when the second local oscillator 124 is in the feedback loop, it together with the first and second integrators 492 and 494 forms a third order loop. The use of a third order loop significantly reduces noise in the system 100.
Additionally, upon the achievement of phase lock with IF.sub.2 the signal provided by comparator 484 disables a search oscillator 496. Before phase-lock is achieved, the search oscillator 496 sweeps in frequency from 3 Mhz above to 3 Mhz below the desired stimulus signal frequency to be generated by the signal source 104. The search oscillator provides its output frequency sweep signal to tuning voltage summation circuitry (TVS-3) 498.
TVS-3 circuit 498 also receives from the 8-bit digital-to-analog converter (DAC) 500 coarse tuning signals. The DAC 500 is under control of signals provided on bus 269. TVS-3 498 provides correction signals on line 160 to the signal source 104.
Additionally, the DAC 500 provides a signal to tuning voltage summation circuitry (TVS-4) 502 which can provide a control signal to the phase lock circuit 314, via line 379, when the second local oscillator is phase-locked to IF.sub.2.
In order to decrease heat dissipation requirements, weight and volume of the power supply of the system 100, a switching power supply 540 is used. It is well known that switching power supplies typically generate electromagnetic interference (EMI) which potentially can interfere with measurement signals (t.sub.1, t.sub.2, r.sub.1, and r.sub.2) if the EMI falls within the passband of the measurement signals.
In the system 100 of the present invention, the frequency of operation of the switching power supply 540 is injection locked so as to strategically place sidebands of the EMI produced by the switching power supply 540 in frequency bands (approximately 55 Khz and 111 Khz) equally spaced above and below the highly sensitive 83.33 Khz (IF.sub.3) measurement signals. Injection locking ensures long term frequency accuracy of the EMI so as to avoid drift into the IF.sub.3 passband.
Details of the switching power supply 540 and injection locking as accomplished in the presently preferred embodiment are provided in commonly assigned co-pending Patent Application, entitled SWITCHING POWER SUPPLY WITH AN INJECTION SIGNAL FREQUENCY LOCKING CIRCUIT, invented by Donald A. Bradley Ser. No. 176,095, now U.S. Pat. No. 4,858,097 filed on the same date as this Application and which is hereby incorporated herein in its entirety by this reference.
FIGS. 19-20 provide schematic diagrams illustrating details of the test set I/O circuit 534. Referring to FIG. 20, the I/O circuit 534 includes five overcurrent protection circuits 554. Each respective overprotection circuit 554 is coupled to respective indicator circuitry 556 which indicates when an overcurrent condition has occurred. Each respective indicator circuit 556 is coupled to respective circuitry 558 which communicates with the I/O processor 190-1.
Details of the overcurrent protection circuits 554 and their operation are provided in commonly assigned co-pending Patent Application, entitled OVER-CURRENT PROTECTION CIRCUIT, invented by Donald A. Bradley, Ser. No. 175,957, now U.S. Pat. No. 4,926,288 filed on the same date as this Application and which is hereby incorporated herein in its entirety by this reference.
Frequency Solution
In operation, the network analyzer system of the present invention can provide scattering parameters for a DUT 102 over a range of discrete frequencies. The number of stimulus signal frequencies for which phase and magnitude information can be measured and the frequency range of interest can be selected by the user. In the preferred embodiment, the maximum number of stimulus signal frequency points is 512, and the minimum number is 74. The number of frequency data points can be chosen by the user so as to optimize phase and magnitude resolution versus speed of operation. It will be appreciated that the more frequency points measured, the longer it will take for the system to provide to the user phase and magnitude information for all of these points.
The measurement system advantageously permits a user to select discrete frequency points within a desired range of frequencies. Alternatively, the user may designate a range of frequencies of interest, and the measurement system will automatically select discrete frequency points within that range for testing of the DUT 102.
The ability of the user to select discrete frequency points is particularly advantageous where the DUT 102 is a device such as a filter in which more frequency points are desired in the skirts than in the pass band of the filter. FIG. 15 illustrates the selection of unevenly spaced discrete frequency points within a range of frequencies of interest bounded by a starting frequency (F.sub.Start) and a stopping frequency (F.sub.Stop). FIG. 16 illustrates a range of frequencies of interest which are evenly spaced within the range of frequencies of interest. In the preferred embodiment, the frequency resolution provided by the signal source 104 is 50 Khz.
The measurement system uses an algorithm to select the frequency of operation of the respective first and second local oscillators 122 and 124 for each frequency point selected by the user. The system then stores these oscillator frequencies for each frequency point, and during actual measurement of a DUT 102, for each discrete test frequency, the stored frequencies of operation of the respective first and second local oscillators 122 and 124 are recalled and are used to control the frequency of operation of the first and second local oscillators 122 and 124.
The algorithm advantageously seeks to use a relatively low harmonic number to generate the 89.4 Mhz first intermediate frequency (IF.sub.1). In practice, this means that it is desirable to use a relatively high frequency of operation for the first local oscillator 122 for each discrete stimulus frequency point. Furthermore, as mentioned above, it is desirable to use a first intermediate frequency of approximately 89.4 Mhz in order to provide continuous frequency coverage in the harmonic mode. The relationship between IF.sub.1 and the frequency of operation of the first local oscillator (F.sub.LO1) , the harmonic number and the stimulus signal frequency (F.sub.ST) is expressed by the following equation:
IF.sub.1 =/H(F.sub.LO1)-F.sub.ST / (5)
The algorithm is explained as follows:
F=(F.sub.ST) (20) (6)
H=1+INT((F+1788)/10730) (7)
Z=5365/(3+H/1250) (8)
F.sub.LO1 =(1+INT((F+Z)/H)/20 (9)
F.sub.LO2 =(H) (F.sub.LO1)-F/20+2.25 (10)
It will be noted that the number 20 is used to normalize the 50 Khz resolution to 1 Mhz in order to simplify the algorithm.
The following illustrates use of the above algorithm to determine the respective frequencies of operation of the first and second local oscillators 122 and 124 for a stimulus signal frequency of 10,000.1 Mhz. The calculation is as follows:
F=(20) (10,000.1)=200,002 (11)
H=1+INT(18.81)=19 (12)
Z=5365/(3+19)/1250)=1779.3 (13)
F.sub.LO1 =(1+INT(200,002+1779.3)/19)/20=531.05 (14)
F.sub.LO2 =19,531.05-200,002/20+2.25=92.1 (15)
Thus for a stimulus frequency of 10,000.1 Mhz, the first local oscillator 122 operates on an F.sub.LO1 of 531.05 Mhz, and the second local oscillator 124 operates at a frequency of F.sub.LO2 -92.1 Mhz. The precise frequencies of operation, however, may be varied in accordance with the spur search and avoidance algorithm which is discussed next.
After the determination of the individual values for F.sub.LO1 and F.sub.LO2 for each of the discrete stimulus signal frequency points selected by a user, the measurement system employs an algorithm to detect spurious signals (spurs) likely to be generated during measurements of a DUT 102. The system uses the algorithm for each discrete selected stimulus signal frequency point for which spurious signals are found, to vary the values of F.sub.LO1 and F.sub.LO2 so as to remove the spurious signals. The result is a significant reduction of spur-related noise in the downconverted reference and test signals. The values for F.sub.LO1 and F.sub.LO2 as modified to avoid spurs, then are stored by the system for use during measurement of a DUT 102.
Spurious signals can result, for example, from the fact that both harmonics of a discrete stimulus signal frequency F.sub.ST and harmonics of the first local oscillator signal frequency F.sub.LO1 exist due to nonlinearities in the harmonic mixers 174. These harmonics may have a mix product in the noise bandwidth of the system 100.
In addition, small portions of the original F.sub.ST and F.sub.LO1 signals can pass through the harmonic mixers 174 with the desired IF.sub.1 signal. These small portions can mix with harmonics of the signals produced by the respective second and third local oscillators 124 and 128 so as to provoke still further spurious signals.
In order to allow maximum dynamic range of the measurement system, it is desirable to eliminate these spurs. The elimination of these spurs using a spur detection and avoidance algorithm is first explained for a particular stimulus signal frequency point at F.sub.ST =3140.90 Mhz. Then the algorithm is explained in general using the flow diagram of FIG. 18.
Using the algorithm discussed above for selecting F.sub.LO1 and F.sub.LO2 the values in Table 2 are selected for F.sub.ST =3140.90 Mhz.
TABLE 2______________________________________ F.sub.ST = 3140.90 Mhz F.sub.LO1 = 461.50 Mhz H = 7 IF.sub.1 = 89.6 Mhz F.sub.LO2 = 91.85 Mhz IF.sub.2 = 2.25 Mhz F.sub.LO3 = 2.33 Mhz IF.sub.3 = 83.33 Khz______________________________________
In this example, the seventh harmonic of F.sub.LO1 (461.50 Mhz.times.7=3230.5 Mhz) is mixed with the F.sub.ST signal to produce IF.sub.1 (89.6 Mhz). IF.sub.1 is mixed with F.sub.LO2 to produce the IF.sub.2 of 2.25 Mhz. The equations are as follows:
IF.sub.1 =H*F.sub.LO1 -F.sub.ST (17)
IF.sub.2 =F.sub.LO2 -IF.sub.1 (18)
Combining:
IF.sub.2 =F.sub.LO2 -(H*F.sub.LO1 -F.sub.ST) (19)
Putting in actual values from Table 2:
2.25=91.85-(7*461.5-3140.9) (20)
Note that the fifth harmonic of F.sub.LO2 will mix with the frequency of the F.sub.LO1 producing a spurious IF.sub.3 which does not result from an R.F. input:
461.50-(5.times.91.85)=2.25 (21)
This spur will produce a nonzero IF.sub.3 output without any R.F. input. In fact, the possibility exists that several different harmonics of F.sub.LO1 and F.sub.LO2 may create spurs. In general, a spur is present if the following conditions are satisfied:
.vertline.(M*F.sub.LO1 -N*F.sub.LO2).vertline.<IF.sub.3 -PB.sub.IF.sbsb.3 /2 and (22)
.vertline.(M*F.sub.LO1 -N*F.sub.LO2).vertline.>IF.sub.3 +PB.sub.IF.sbsb.3 /2(23)
M and N are small integers whose range depends upon the passband of the system, and PB.sub.IF.sbsb.3 is the passband of the bandpass filter 396, e.g., 10 Khz (see FIG. 11).
This relationship is illustrated in FIG. 17 in which M=1. The absolute value of the first terms of the inequalities is reflected in a range above and below the F.sub.LO1. In this example, only the fundamental (first harmonic, M=1) of F.sub.LO1 is capable of causing a spur; M is limited to the value of 1. If the value of F.sub.LO2 is approximately 90 Mhz, for example, and the value of F.sub.LO1 can range from 357 Mhz to 536.5 Mhz, then the meaningful values for N would be 4 through 6. So all of the combinations of M=1 and N=4 through N=6 must be tested in inequalities 22 and 23.
In order to remove this spur, the values of M and F.sub.LO2 can be changed so as to maintain the same resulting IF.sub.3 while avoiding creation of a spur. This can be explained as follows. By rearranging equation (19), we have:
F.sub.st =H*F.sub.LO1 -F.sub.LO2 +IF.sub.2 (24)
Thus, the values of F.sub.LO1 and F.sub.LO2 can be varied to maintain this equation, while avoiding the conditions of inequalities (22) and (23). In the case of the preferred embodiment, the first and second local oscillators 122 and 124 are programmable in 50 Khz steps; so their frequencies must be changed by multiples of this value. If the value of F.sub.LO1 is increased by 1 Mhz/H, or 150 Khz (H=7) at 50 Khz resolution, then the value of F.sub.LO2 must be increased by H*150 Khz or 1.05 Mhz at 50 Khz resolution. Substituting into equation (19):
2.25=92.9-(7*461.65-3140.9) (25)
The new values, corrected for spurs, for F.sub.ST =3140.9 Mhz will be as follows:
TABLE 3______________________________________ F.sub.ST = 3140.90 Mhz F.sub.LO1 = 461.65 Mhz IF.sub.1 = 90.65 Mhz F.sub.LO2 = 92.9 Mhz IF.sub.2 = 2.25 Mhz F.sub.LO3 = 2.33 Mhz IF.sub.3 = 83.33 Khz______________________________________
As can clearly be seen from Table 3, the new frequencies F.sub.LO1 and F.sub.LO2 have no effect upon the final results. Note that IF.sub.1 is slightly higher, but the fairly broad band I.F. filter can be used to pass this frequency as well. FIG. 5 and 5B illustrate filtering of IF.sub.1.
The effect on the spur of the new values in Table 3 is that the fifth harmonic of F.sub.LO2 and the harmonic of F.sub.LO1 results in a frequency of 2.85 Mhz, outside the passband of filter 396.
The algorithm illustrated in FIG. 18 interactively performs a check for combinations of harmonics of F.sub.LO1 and F.sub.LO2 that cause a spur, and adjusts the frequencies of the first and second local oscillators 122 and 124 to remove the spurs. The algorithm is employed to correct for spurs for each discrete stimulus signal frequency point selected by the user. It will be noted that the frequency range of the first local oscillator 122 is approximately 357-536.5 Mhz, and the frequency range of the second local oscillator 124 is approximately 91.65 .+-.1.875 MHz (harmonic mode).
FIG. 21 provides a timing diagram illustrating the processor pipeline timing of the system 100 of the presently preferred embodiment for three sequential stimulus signal frequencies: F.sub.N-1, F.sub.N and F.sub.N+1. The operation of the processor pipeline is explained in relation to stimulus signal frequency F.sub.N.
During time periods T.sub.1 -T.sub.7, the I/O processor 190-1 measures the Real and Imaginary signals provided by the synchronous detectors 130. Table 4 explains details of the measurement process for each time period.
TABLE 4______________________________________Time Measurement Activity______________________________________T.sub.1 Gain and Phase RangingT.sub.2 Delay Due to Settling Time of Filters 396, 452, 454T.sub.3 Initialization of ADC 150T.sub.4 Sample and HoldT.sub.5 Analog-to-Digital Conversion and correction for errors in ADC 150T.sub.6 Send Signal Source 104 to F.sub.N+1T.sub.7 Format Measurement Data for F.sub.N in Floating Point Format for Transfer to Main Processor 190-2A on FIFO 528______________________________________
During time periods T.sub.8 -T.sub.10, the first main processor 190-2A and the first math co-processor 190-2B correct the measured data for stimulus frequency F.sub.N to remove system-induced errors. Table 5 explains details of the correction process for each time period.
TABLE 5______________________________________Time Measurement Activity______________________________________T.sub.8 Remove the Effects of Gain and Phase RangingT.sub.9 12-Term Error Correction (or Subset of 12-Term Error Correction).sub. T.sub.10 Send Corrected Measurement Data for F.sub.N to the Second Main Processor 190-3A______________________________________
During time periods T.sub.11 -T.sub.12, the second main processor 190-3A and the second math co-processor 190-3B display the measurement data for F.sub.N. Table 6 explains details of the display process for time periods T.sub.11 -T.sub.12.
TABLE 6______________________________________Time Measurement Activity______________________________________T.sub.11 Convert the Measurement Data for F.sub.N to a Coordinate Graph Type (Dependent Upon Graph Type Selected by User)T.sub.12 Display coordinate Graph of Measurement Data on RGB Monitor 548______________________________________
The following equations represent the uncorrected S-parameters. The processors 190-1, 190-2A-190-2B and 190-3A-190-3B cooperate to calculate these parameters in accordance with these equations to correct for system errors and to display the S-parameters as described above. ##EQU1##
Details of Ports I and II are described as follows. The connector system illustrated in the drawings is particularly adapted for carrying signals above 20 Ghz and even as high as 46 Ghz, but is not, of course, limited in its utility to such high frequency operation. But at the higher frequencies, challenges exist because of the small size of the microwave components with which the connectors must interface. Further, the coaxial connectors themselves are necessarily very small in order to inhibit unwanted higher order modes when carrying such high frequency signals. The smaller connectors are thus generally more fragile and susceptible to damage. Further, their manufacture within the mechanical tolerances required for satisfactory electrical operation places additional constraints on the configuration and the methods of manufacture.
The connector system illustrated in the drawings satisfies these requirements. A microwave component 711 carries a microwave device 713 within a housing 715. The device 713 can be, for example, a microstrip, coplanar waveguide, or suspended substrate. A launcher 717 is provided as the first external element to the microwave device 711 for providing a coaxial connector for the device. The launcher 717 is threaded into the housing 15. A third piece of the connector system illustrated in the drawings is a connector 719 which terminates one end of a coaxial cable 721. The illustrated connector system electrically connects a signal from the microwave device 713 to the outside world through a center conductor 723 of the coaxial cable 721.
Details of each of the three primary components of the connector system will now be described. The first element shown in FIGS. 23 and 24 in connecting the microwave device 713 to the outside world is the connection of a conductor 725 thereto by a quantity of solder 727. The conductor 725 is held within a cylindrically shaped glass bead 729 having an outer cylindrical metal layer 731. The glass bead assembly 729 is held in the metal housing 715 by a quantity of solder 733 that is allowed to flow around the glass bead, thereby providing a secure hermetic seal and electrical connection. The opening in the housing wall is stepped so that a smaller opening portion 737 is provided for passage of the conductor 725 without contacting it. This stepped structure is designed to maintain a uniform impedance along the signal path.
In order to compensate for fringing capacitances that result from the stepped structure, an interface compensation gap 739 is provided between an end of the microwave device 713 and the vertical wall of the housing 715 that carries the bead 729. Additionally, the length of the conductor 725 from that wall to its end in contact with the microwave device 713 is carefully controlled. Further, another compensation gap 741 between the housing wall and the glass bead 729 is provided. The gaps 739 and 741 introduce a series inductance into the signal path that compensates for undesired fringing capacitances resulting from the diameter steps of the system.
A miniscus 743 surrounds the center conductor 725 on one side of the glass bead 729, as a result of the manufacturing process. In order to form a clean wall at the end of a cavity 745 in the housing 715, the bead 729 is oriented so that the miniscus 743 is positioned toward the microwave device 713, as best shown in FIG. 24. Prior connectors, because of the equipment used in installing the conductor 725 in the glass bead 729, place the miniscus on the side of the glass bead of the longest extending length of its inner conductor. The geometry of the fixtures holding the conductor in the glass bead while the glass was heated to melt it for insertion of the conductor resulted in this occurring. The present structure, however, is a result of assembling the conductor 725 through the glass bead 729 in a manner that the miniscus is always on the short pin side of the resulting structure. The result is to eliminate the miniscus from possible interference with fingers forming a female connector 747 at an end of a conductor pin 749 within the launcher 717. Damage to these fingers is avoided, and the fingers may be pushed onto the conductor 725 much closer to the bead 729. These are desirable features in a small, high frequency connector system.
As best illustrated in FIG. 25, the launcher 717 includes an outer, cylindrically shaped threaded housing 751. Alternative methods of attaching a launcher to the component 711 are certainly possible, such as by forming a flange on the launcher that is attached to a flat outer surface of the component, the threaded attachment illustrated herein being exemplary. At one end of the housing, a cylindrically shaped insert 753 snugly and precisely fits. A ledge 755 is formed internal of the housing 751 by a change of diameter of its inner opening between the portion in which the insert 753 exists and a smaller diameter portion 757. At another end of the housing 751 is yet another enlarged diameter opening 759, forming a ledge 761 between it and the interior, smaller diameter opening 757.
The conductor pin 749 is held in the center of the opening 757, thereby to form a very short coaxial transmission path having an air dielectric. The pin 749 is so held by a solid dielectric disc 763 having an outer diameter slightly larger than that of the opening 757 but smaller than that of the opening in the housing 751 in which the insert 753 is placed. An opening is provided at one end of the insert 753 for snugly receiving the dielectric disc 763. Therefore, the insert 753 causes the disc 763 to be urged tightly against the ledge 755 of the housing 751 to hold its attached center conductor pin 749 firmly in place. The insert 753 is so held by a wall of the microwave device 711 when the launcher is fully threaded into the opening 45 of the housing 715, as shown in FIG. 23.
The structure of the launcher 717 has a significant advantage of allowing for tightly controlled tolerance of the compensation steps in the inner conductor 749 and inner surface of the outer conductor formed by the housing 751 and insert 753. By positioning the support bead 763 in the insert 753, thereby allowing the insert 753 to directly contact the ledge 755 of the housing 751, the tolerances that must necessarily exist in each part do not accumulate as they do in the prior art structures. In prior devices, only the bead 763 contacts the ledge 755, the insert 753 being on an opposite side of the bead 763. It can be seen that this prior structure, therefore, has a wider possible tolerance range since any errors in dimensions of the support bead and the insert can add together to make an even larger dimensional error. However, the structure of the launcher 717 illustrated in the drawings avoids this potential undesirable accumulation of dimensional errors.
The structure of the launcher 717 has another important advantage. Should the connectors at the ends of the pin 749 become damaged, the unitary pin 747 and bead 763 structure can be removed and replaced by first removing the housing 751, and then the insert 753. Easy repair is thus possible without disturbing or damaging the microwave device 713, for it is mechanically protected by the glass bead 729.
Referring to FIGS. 26, 27 and 28, a preferred technique for attaching the insulating bead with the center conductor 749 is shown. Its position along the axial length of the conductor 749 is controlled by the position of a reduced diameter portion 765 having a length equal to the thickness of the support bead 763. An enlarged diameter portion 767 exists between the bead holding slot 765 and a smaller diameter female receptacle 747. The receptacle 747 includes four fingers extended and dimensioned to grip the pin 25 when pushed over it, thereby to form an electrical connection between them. On an opposite side of the recess 765 is an enlarged portion 769.
The bead 763 is initially formed into the desired shape, including a center aperture having a diameter substantially equal to that of the diameter of the slot 765 in the pin 749. Other holes illustrated in the support bead are provided to adjust its effective dielectric constant. The material for the bead 763 should be a thermoplastic having the characteristic of returning to its initial size when cooled after heating and stretching. An example of such a material is PPO brand polyphenylene oxide available from the General Electric Company. Grade EN265 of this material has been found to be satisfactory. The bead 763 is machined from such material to the dimensions desired for the bead when assembled onto the conductor 749. The bead 763 is then heated until softened, its center aperture 771 expanded by mechanical force, and the enlarged opening slid over the portion 767 of the pin 749. The bead 763 is then held over the slot 765 until it has cooled. In the cooling process, it shrinks back to its original shape and the opening 771 of the bead tightly grips the pin portion 765.
This method of attaching a support bead to a center conductor is much simpler and provides a better result than techniques currently used. One such prior technique is to glue the bead on a uniform diameter pin, but this does not provide the same degree of mechanical strength. Another technique is to form the pin in two segments which are threaded together at a reduced diameter slot, the pin being separated into its two components, a bead being slid onto the reduced diameter portion, and the pin reassembled. Not only is this complicated and expensive, but such a screw connection can also cause operational problems. Another technique is to injection mold the bead right onto the center pin, but this is an extremely expensive process and very difficult to accomplish for such small parts as are required for the high frequency connectors being described.
A larger end 773 of the pin 749 is shown in the drawings to be of the female type, having four extended spring fingers. Adapted for mating with this connector is a male pin 775 of the coaxial connector 719. The result of the connections on the microwave component 711 and the use of the launcher 717 provides a signal path from the very small microwave device 713 to a relatively large coaxial female center connector 773. It will be recognized, of course, that a male pin could be substituted for the female receptacle 773 and a mating female receptacle substituted for the pin 775 of a connector component to be connected to it.
The connector component shown herein for attachment to the launcher 717 is the coaxial connector 719, but it will be understood that other standard connection components could be substituted. Referring to FIG. 29, the pin 775 is mechanically held into a metal outer conductor connector 777 by an insulating support bead 779. The center connector 723 of the coaxial cable 721 is soldered to a backside 781 of the pin 775. An outer conductor 783 of the coaxial cable 721 is mechanically and electrically attached to an inner surface of a cylindrical aperture in an end of the holder 777. A coupling nut 785 is also carried by the connector 777 and has internal threads attached to the threads of the launcher 717.
An end 787 of the connector piece 777 at its end of the male pin 775 is cylindrically shaped with a diameter to fit snugly inside the circular recess 759 of the launcher 717. When fully inserted, the pin 775 is inserted into the female connector portion 773, as shown in FIGS. 23 and 31. The attaching parts of the launcher 717 and the coaxial cable connector 719 are cooperatively dimensioned so that the pin 775 does not engage the receptacle 773 until after the connector portions are coaxially aligned. That is, the two inner conductor connector portions do not touch each other until the mating cylindrical portions 759 (launcher 717) and 787 (coaxial, cable connector 719) are aligned. This is accomplished by making the length of the pin 775 that extends beyond the end of the bead 779 be less than the distance from the end of the launcher 717 at the surface 759 to the closest point of the receptacle 773. As can be seen from FIG. 30, if the connector 719 is positioned at an angle with respect to the launcher 717, no damage will be done to the receptacle 773 or the pin 775 since they do not contact until the cable connector piece 777 and the launcher 717 are coaxially aligned. That is, so long as the angular relationship illustrated in FIG. 30 persists, no connection can be made. It is only when the two connector portions are coaxially aligned that they can be pushed together for the inner conductors to engage each other as shown in FIG. 31.
The short pin has a further advantage of eliminating a radio frequency resonance from the frequency band of the connector. This resonance can occur in existing connectors and is particularly a problem as the frequency increases since a resonance condition can be created with very small cavities or irregularities. As shown in FIG. 32, the short pin 775 is contacted only at the entry end of the receptacle 773 by the ends of the four fingers that form the receptacle 773. These fingers are mechanically desirable, but the slots required to form them can result in a small portion of the radio frequency field entering the coaxial section and undesirably resonating. However, with the short pin of the present system, the resonant frequency occurs above the frequency range for which the connector is designed.
Various improvements and modifications can be made to the system 100 of the preferred embodiment without departing from the spirit and scope of the invention. For example, instead of using a source lock in conjunction with an analyzer 108, a source lock can be used in conjunction with various other devices used to extract phase and/or magnitude information from signals.
Referring to FIG. 22 there is shown exemplary components of a source locking circuit. Components which directly correspond to elements described above for the preferred embodiment are labelled with primed reference numerals identical to the reference numerals used to identify the corresponding elements of the system 100.
It will be appreciated that the measurement device identified by reference numeral 560 can be an analyzer such as that disclosed in the system 100. Alternatively, for example, it can be an amplitude detector, a log magnitude detector, a synchronous detector, an oscilloscope, a modulation meter or some other measurement device.
Furthermore, although the source lock components in FIG. 22 include two local oscillators 122' and 124' and two mixers 174' and 178', it will be appreciated that a source lock could be achieved using only a single local oscillator and only a single mixer. The advantage gained by using source locking still would be achieved: accurate stimulus signal frequency without the need to employ a costly synthesizer.
OPERATION OF THE MODEL 360 VECTOR NETWORK ANALYZER
General Description
The Model 360 Vector Network Analyzer System measures the magnitude and phase characteristics of networks, such as filters, amplifiers, attenuators, and antennas. It does so by comparing the incident signal leaving the analyzer with the signal transmitted through the test device or reflected from its input circuit. FIG. 33 illustrates the types of measurements that the 360 is capable of making.
The 360 is a self-contained, fully integrated measurement system that includes an optional time domain capability.
Vector Network Analyzer Basics
The network analyzer is a tuned receiver (FIG. 34). The microwave signal is down converted into the passband of the IF. To measure the phase of this signal, we must have a reference to compare it with. If the phase of a signal is 90 degrees, it is 90 degrees different from the reference signal. The network analyzer would read this as -90 degrees, since the test signal is delayed by 90 degrees with respect to the reference signal.
This phase reference can be obtained by splitting off some of the microwave signal before the measurement (FIG. 35). The phase of the microwave signal after it has passed through the device under test (DUT) is then compared with the reference signal. A network analyzer test set automatically samples the reference signal, so no external hardware is needed.
Let us consider for a moment that you remove the DUT and substitute a length of transmission line (FIG. 36). Note that the path length of the test signal is longer than that of the reference signal. Now let us see how this affects our measurement.
Assume that we are making a measurement at 1 Ghz and that the difference in path-length between the two signals is exactly 1 wavelength. This means that test signal is lagging the reference signal by 360 degrees (FIG. 37). We cannot really tell the difference between one sine wave maxima and the next (they are all identical), so the network analyzer would measure a phase difference of 0 degrees.
Now consider that we make this same measurement at 1.1 Ghz. The frequency is higher by 10 percent so therefore the wavelength is shorter by 10 percent. The test signal path length is now 0.1 wavelength longer than that of the reference signal (FIG. 38). This test signal is
1.1.times.360=396 degrees.
This is 36 degrees different from the phase measurement at 1 Ghz. The network analyzer will display this phase difference as -36 degrees. The test signal at 1.1 GHz is delayed by 36 degrees more than the test signal at 1 Ghz.
You can see that if the measurement frequency is 1.2 Ghz we will get a reading of -72 degrees, -108 degrees for 1.3 Ghz, etc. (FIG. 39). There is an electrical delay between the reference and test signals. For this delay we will use the common industry term of reference delay. You may also hear it referred to as phase delay. In older network analyzers you had to equalize the length of the reference arm with that of the test arm in order to make an appropriate measurement of phase vs. frequency.
To measure phase on a DUT, we want to remove this phase-change-vs-frequency-due-to changes in the electrical length. This will allow us to view the actual phase characteristics. These characteristics may be much smaller than the phase-change-due-to-electrical-length difference.
There are two ways of accomplishing this. The most obvious way is to insert a length of line into the reference signal path to make both paths of equal length (FIG. 40). With perfect transmission lines and a perfect splitter, we would then measure a constant phase as we change the frequency. The problem using this approach is that we must change the line length with each measurement setup.
Another approach is to handle the path length difference in software. FIG. 41 displays the phase-v-frequency of a device. This device has different effects on the output phase at different frequencies. Because of these differences, we do not have a perfectly linear phase response. We can easily detect this phase deviation by compensating for the linear phase. The size of the phase difference increases linearly with frequency so we can modify the phase display to eliminate this delay.
The 360 offers automatic reference delay compensation with the punch of a button. FIG. 42 shows the resultant measurement when we compensate path length. In a system application you can usually correct for length differences; however, the residual phase characteristics are critical.
The algorithm used to calculate the reference delay required to flatten a phase response sums the phase deltas between adjacent points for the entire sweep. This phase sum is used to calculate a reference delay value that equalizes the phase of the start and stop frequencies.
The algorithm is based on the "average" phase difference between points or the total phase difference between the start and stop frequency: ##EQU2## where dx=extra line length in system.
The value of dx depends upon whether coaxial cable, waveguide or microstrip is the medium for which automatic reference delay is calculated. ##EQU3##
Network Analyzer Measurements
Now let us consider measuring the DUT. Consider a two port device; that is, a device with a connector on each end. What measurements would be of interest?
First, we could measure the reflection characteristics at either end with the other end terminated into 50 ohms. If we designate one end as the normal place for the input, that gives a reference. We can then define the reflection characteristics from the reference end as forward reflection, and those from the other end as reverse reflection (FIG. 43).
Second, we can measure the forward and reverse transmission characteristics. However, instead of saying "forward", "reverse", "reflection", and "transmission" all of the time, we use a shorthand. That is all that S-Parameters are, a shorthand! That "S" stands for scattering. The first number is the port that the signal is leaving, while the second is the port to which the signal is being injected. S.sub.11, therefore, is the signal leaving port 1 relative to the signal entering port 1. The four scattering parameters (FIG. 44):
S.sub.11 Forward Reflection
S.sub.21 Forward Transmission
S.sub.22 Reverse Reflection
S.sub.12 Reverse Transmission
S-Parameters can be displayed in many ways. An S-Parameter consists of a magnitude and a phase. We can display the magnitude in dB, just like a scaler network analyzer. We often call this term log magnitude.
We can display phase as "linear phase" (FIG. 45). As discussed earlier, we can't tell the difference between one cycle and the next. Therefore, after going through 360 degrees we are back to where we began. We can display the measurement from -180 to +180 degrees. The -180 to +180 approach is more common. It keeps the display discontinuity removed from the important 0 degree area used as the phase reference.
There are several ways in which all the information can be displayed on one trace. One method is a polar display (FIG. 46). The radial parameter (distance from the center) is magnitude. The rotation around the circle is a phase. We sometimes use polar displays to view transmission measurements, especially on cascaded devices (devices in series). The transmission result is the addition of the phase and log magnitude (dB) information of each device's polar display.
As we have discussed, the signal reflected from a DUT has both magnitude and phase. This is because the impedance of the device has both a resistive and a reactive term of the form r+jx. We refer to the "r" as the real or resistive term, while we call "x" the imaginary or reactive term. The "j", which we sometimes denote as "i", is an imaginary number. It is the square root of -1. If x is positive, the impedance is inductive, if x is negative the impedance is capacitive.
The size and polarity of the reactive component x is important in impedance matching. The best match to a complex impedance is the complex conjugate. This complex-sounding term simply means an impedance with the same value of r and x, but with x of opposite polarity. This term is best analyzed using a Smith Chart (FIG. 47), which is a plot of r and x. We will discuss Smith Charts in greater detail below.
To display all the information on a single S-parameter requires one or two traces, depending upon format we want. A very common requirement is to view forward reflection on a Smith Chart (one trace) while observing forward transmission in Log Magnitude and Phase (two traces). Let us see how to accomplish this on the 360.
The 360 has four channels. Each channel can display a complete S-Parameter in any format on either one or two traces. All four S-Parameters can be seen simultaneously in any desired format. A total of eight traces can be viewed at the same time. While this is a lot of information to digest, the 360's large color display makes recognizing and analyzing the data surprisingly easy.
Another important parameter we can measure when phase information is available is group delay. In linear devices, the phase change through the DUT is linear-with-frequency. Thus, doubling the frequency also doubles the phase change. An important measurement, especially for communications system users, is the rate of change of phase-vs-frequency (group delay). If the rate of phase-change-vs-frequency is not constant, the DUT is nonlinear. This nonlinearity can create distortion in communications systems. We will discuss this in greater detail below.
Measurement Error Correction
Since we can measure microwave signals in both magnitude and phase, it is possible to correct for six major error terms:
Source Test Port Match
Load Test Port Math
Directivity
Isolation
Transmission Frequency Response
Reflection Frequency Response
We can correct for each of these six error terms in both the forward and reverse directions, hence the name 12-term error correction. Since 12-term error correction requires both forward and reverse measurement information, the test set must be reversing. "Reversing" means that it must be able to apply the measurement signal in either the forward or reverse direction.
To accomplish this error correction, we measure the magnitude and phase of each error signal (FIG. 48). Magnitude and phase information appear as a vector that is mathematically applied to the measurement signal. This process is termed vector error correction. We will discuss this concept in greater detail below.
Test Sets
We have now learned about reference delay. We have discussed S-Parameters. We know what they are, how to measure them, and how to display them. We have also learned a little about vector error correction. Let us now turn to the 360 Test Sets. We will see how well they meet our measurement needs.
The basic WILTRON Test Set is called a "Reversing Test Set" (FIG. 49). It contains an internal switch to select the direction of the microwave signal. Each port has a directional device. Any S-Parameter can be measured and 12-term error correction can be applied automatically. In fact, we can measure all four S-Parameters simultaneously and apply a 12-term error correction to each. Also, with the dedicated synthesized source, we update the display rapidly enough to allow real-time tuning of the DUT.
Note that the coupler on Port 2 is aligned different from the coupler on Port 1, The throughline of the Port 2 coupler goes directly into the forward transmission test sampler. There is no coupling-factor loss. This design approach optimizes the dynamic range of forward-transmission measurements. Coupling-factor loss is the most important requirement for large dynamic range measurements.
The two Reference Delay Lines (one for each port) are internal connections. Since the Wiltron system always uses a synthesized signal, we can accurately compensate reference delay in software. While the capability for changing the actual line length is still present, most people will rarely need to use it.
The Wiltron 4O Ghz Test Set (Model 3611) does not contain internally accessible reference delay loops. The additional line length would significantly affect dynamic range at high frequencies. You can change these internal line lengths. The Models 3620 and 3621 Active Device Test Sets (FIG. 50) are similar to the two reversing models. The exception is a third step attenuator located in the forward transmission line just ahead of the sampler. This step attenuator provides for measuring devices with output powers greater than -10 dBm. This additional step attenuator can be used to reduce the power into the forward transmission measurement sampler. Reverse transmission and output match measurements are unaffected by the step attenuator. The input match and attenuation of the step attenuator is measured and stored with the calibration data during the calibration process.
TUTORIAL
This tutorial introduces you to the 360 control panel and three basic measurement operations. It guides you through a typical calibration sequence and two basic network analyzer measurements: transmission and reflection.
______________________________________a. Equipment Needed______________________________________360 Network Analyzer3610 Test Set360SS47 Source3650 Cal Kit3670A50-2 Through Cable______________________________________
b. Initialize the System
Install the system disk and turn the power on. The 360 automatically performs a self test and comes on line with the same control panel setting as when exited last.
c. Backup the System Diskette
1. Remove the system diskette and install a blank diskette in its place.
2. Press the UTILITY MENU key (FIG. 52).
3. Using the MENU cursor and ENTER keys (FIG. 52), select the menu options. An appendix attached hereto shows menu option displays for the system of the present invention along with error codes provided from the measurement system and command codes acceptable to the measurement system.
4. Select GENERAL DISK UTILITIES when Menu U1, Utility Menu appears.
5. Select INITIALIZE DISK WITH PROGRAM when Menu U2, Disk Utilities Functions appears.
6. Follow the instructions displayed on the screen to complete the backup procedure.
d. Load Calibration Kit Data
1. Install the data diskette from the Model 3651, 3652, or 3653 Calibration Kit.
2. Press the UTILITY MENU key.
3. Select CALIBRATION COMPONENT UTILITIES when menu UI, Utilities Menu appears.
4. Select INSTALL CALIBRATION COMPONENT INFORMATION FROM DISK when Menu U4, Calibration Component Utilities appears.
5. To ensure that correct calibration data has been loaded, select DISPLAY INSTALLED CALIBRATION COMPONENT INFORMATION on Menu U4.
6. Select the appropriate component type (SMA[M], SMA[F], K-Conn[M], etc.) when Menu U5, Display Installed Calibration Components Information appears.
7. When the Readout Text associated with Menu U5 appears in the display area of the CRT, check that the serial number for your Open or Short device is correct for the component in your kit.
Full 12 Term Calibration, Precision
Broadband Termination
WILTRON'S precision broadband terminations are the ideal impedance reference for calibrating network analyzers. They are easier to use, more repeatable, and less expensive than sliding loads. However, sliding loads, when correctly used and perfectly aligned can be more accurate.
a. Connect the Thruline
Install the thru cable, WILTRON Co. Part No. PN3670A50, to Port 2 on the Test Set. We will refer to the unterminated end of this cable as Port 2 for all calibration and measurement steps.
b. Begin the Calibration
1. Press the DEFAULT PROGRAM key (FIG. 52).
2. Press the BEGIN CAL key (FIG. 52).
NOTE
Selecting these menu options automatically calls the next menu in the listed sequence.
3. Select FULL 12 TERM when Menu C5, Select Calibration appears.
4. Select NORMAL when Menu C1, Select Calibration Data Points appears.
5. Set 0.5-18 GHz when Menu C2, Frequency Range of Calibration appears.
6. Select CHANGE OF PORT 1 CONN when Menu C3, Confirm Calibration Parameters appears.
7. Select GPC-7 when menu C4, Select Connector Type appears.
8. Select CHANGE PORT 2 CONN when Menu C3 reappears.
9. Select GPC-7 when menu C4 reappears.
10. Select CHANGE LOAD TYPE when Menu C3, reappears.
11. Select BROADBAND LOAD when Menu C6, Select Load Type appears.
12. Select START CAL when Menu C3 reappears.
13. Follow the instruction in each of the upcoming Calibration Sequence menus. Each step allows you to view the calibration data being taken and then retake the data if desired. This saves you from having to repeat the complete calibration because of an undetected error--such as, a poorly mated connection.
14. When Menu C10, Calibration Sequence Completed appears, you can choose to store the calibration data on a disk. You should always choose to do this; steps 15 thru 19 show you how.
15. Press the SAVE/RECALL MENU key (FIG. 52).
16. Select SAVE when Menu SR1, Save/Recall Front Panel Information appears.
17. Select SAVE CAL DATA AND FRONT PANEL SETUP ON DISK, when Menu SR2, Recall or Save appears.
18. Select CREATE NEW FILE, when the GP1-3, Select File menu appears.
19. Enter CAL 1 and your initials using the knob, when the Menu GP5, Select Name appears. When finished, move to DONE and press the ENTER key. You can assign an 8 character file name and up to 15 additional spaces for other information.
c. Discussion
During calibration, the 360 automatically
1. Sets the number of points to maximum--501 points.
2. Sets averaging to 128 while the loads are being measured.
3. Sets the Video IF bandwidth to the REDUCED value (1 kHz).
NOTE
The above values are default values that can be changed through menu selection.
A lower noise floor can be achieved by reducing the Video IF bandwidth and averaging several measurements. However, the default values have been found to be optimum for providing a compromise between a low noise floor and data-taking speed. Reducing the Video IF bandwidth eliminates unwanted noise by more closely tracking the desired frequency. Averaging several measurements removes random variations and effectively improves noise floor performance. However, reducing video IF bandwidth and increasing the number of averages causes an increase in sweep time.
Smoothing is not necessary nor desirable during calibration, since it does not affect the actual measurement data and will mask any rapid response variations displayed. This can lead to a sense of false confidence, both when performing the calibration and when monitoring the displayed calibration data for measurement errors.
Measuring Transmission
Now let us consider the effect of calibration on transmission measurements. Press the APPLY CAL key, to tune off the calibration. Leave the throughline connected between Port 1 and Port 2.
Let us look only at S.sub.21 (forward transmission). Set up the 360 for a single display with Log Mag and Phase using channel 3 and the graph menu, as follows:
1. Press the CHANNEL MENU key (FIG. 52).
2. Select SINGLE DISPLAY when Menu CM, Select Display Mode appears.
3. Press the CH3 key.
4. Press the S PARAMS key.
5. Select S21 FWD TRANS when Menu SP, Select S-Parameter appears.
6. Press the GRAPH TYPE key.
7. Select LOG MAGNITUDE AND PHRASE when Menu GT1, Select Graph Type appears.
8. Press the AUTOSCALE key.
9. Notice the sawtooth pattern of the phase display. This represents the phase shift resulting
10. Press the APPLY CAL key to apply the calibration.
11. Notice that both the magnitude and phase appear to be flat. The amplitude and phase uncertainties have been removed from the magnitude measurement. A software phase correction has been added. It makes the reference arm and the test arm appear to be the same length.
12. The test arm now includes the same cable used in the calibration. Therefore, any deviation from 0 dB magnitude and 0 degree phase constitute the uncertainty of the measurement. This uncertainty results from random errors such as connector repeatability. It is dependent on the quality of both the calibration and the calibration components.
13. Press the AUTOSCALE key.
14. Set the averaging for best performance, as follows:
(a) Press the AVG/SMOOTH MENU key.
(b) Enter 50 from the keypad for the AVERAGING XXXX MEAS PER POINT option.
(c) Press the X1 terminator key (FIG. 52).
NOTE
Fifty averages typically provide a good balance between a smoother waveform and its tradeoff, increased total measurement time.
(d) Press the AVERAGE key to enable the averaging function.
Melting Reflection
Now let us consider the effect of calibration on reflection measurements.
1. Press the APPLY CAL key (FIG. 52) to disable the calibration.
2. Press the AVERAGE key (FIG. 52) to disable the Averaging Function.
3. Remove the throughline.
4. Connect the broadband load to Port 1.
5. Set the start frequency to 2 GHz, as follows:
(a) Press the SETUP MENU key.
(b) Change the START frequency to 2 GHz and press ENTER, when Menu SU1, Sweep Setup appears.
6. Set up the 360 to measure S.sub.11 (return loss) as follows:
(a) Press the CHANNEL MENU key.
(b) Select SINGLE DISPLAY when Menu CM, Select Display Mode appears.
(c) Press the S PARAMS key.
(d) Select S.sub.11 FWD REFL when Menu SP, Select S-Parameter appears.
(e) Press the CH1 key.
(f) Press the GRAPH TYPE key.
(g) Select LOG MAGNITUDE when Menu GT1, Select Graph Type appears.
7. Press the AUTOSCALE key.
8. Using Marker 1 and the Readout Marker feature, find the worst case return loss as follows:
(a) Press the MARKER MENU key (FIG. 52).
(b) Place the cursor on MARKER 1 and press the ENTER key, when Menu M1, Set Markers appears.
(c) Press the READOUT MARKER key.
(d) Choose MARKER TO MAX and press the ENTER key, when Marker M4, Readout Marker appears.
INSTRUMENT OPERATION-AN OVERVIEW
Power-Up Characteristics
When initially turned on (powered up), the 360 comes on line with the factory-selected default settings. On subsequent power-ups, it generally returns to the exact status and display that it was in when powered down last. (An exception is when the stored control panel setup data has been lost, then it comes on with the default settings.)
After coming on line, the 360 executes a self test. It then attempts to load its operating software from the installed disk. If unable to do so, it attempts to load from an internal ROM cartridge. If neither option is possible, it displays the message: "DISK NOT READY--PRESS ENTER TO TRY AGAIN." It then waits for you to take the appropriate action.
During the self test if the program detects a system fault, it shuts the system down and displays an error message. (A system fault is one that occurs in the 360, the test set, or the source.) If the program detects a fault in a peripheral device (such as the printer), it does not shut the system down. It only displays an error message.
Measurement Control
Measurement control is provided through selections of start, stop, and marker frequencies, as follows:
a. Start and Stop Frequencies
Start and stop frequencies must meet the following criteria:
1. Be within the range of the frequency source and test set.
2. Have a span that provides 100 kHz resolution for the 360 SSXX source.
3. Have a start frequency lower than the stop frequency.
NOTE
You may change the start and stop frequencies after calibration. However, your new frequencies must fall within the calibrated range when the calibration is applied.
b. Marker Frequencies
If there are markers at frequencies other than the equally spaced set of calibration frequencies, they will be readjusted to a calibration frequency.
Data Enhancement
Vector Error Correction
The 360 provides software correction for inherent measurement-setup error terms. Additionally, you can select software correction for any four measurements: Frequency Response, Reflection only, One Path-Two Port, or Full 12-Term.
b. Data Averaging
You can average measurements over time for a more accurate readout of noisy, rapidly changing amplitude data. In averaging, you select the number of points for which you wish averaging calculated. The sweep then stops at each frequency point and takes that number of readings. The program then averages the amplitude readings at the frequency point and writes the average value on the displayed graph-type. For calibration, the averaging function defaults to 128. You may reset it to any other value, however.
c. Smoothing
You can smooth (amplitude only) measurement variations over a frequency span of from 0 to 20 percent of the sweep. The smoothing process uses a raise Hamming window to average the data from a span of frequencies. For example, in FIG. 51 if the program averages all data points from A to B to give point X then the average of all points from A+1 to B+1 is X+1.
d. Normalization (Trace Memory)
Normalization means taking data from a standard component (filter or attenuator, for example), then later comparing it with another like item. To normalize data means to add, subtract, multiply, or divide it by standard data taken earlier and stored in memory. When the measured data taken from the two components are the same, the 360 displays a straight line. If they differ, however, it displays the degree of departure of the new data from the stored data.
Human Interface
The 360 interfaces with the user through a system of informative menus coordinated with control panel keys. You are always prompted by the menus or complete an action by pressing one or more keys, If the key is one of the menu-allowed choices, then the 360 responds in one of the following ways:
It displays a different menu.
It enters a numeric value.
It allows a choice in the current menu.
If the key is not one of the above choices, the 360 beeps.
a. Channel Concert
The 360 has four measurement channels that you can display simultaneously, individually, or in pairs. You can display a different S-Parameter on each channel. Or, you can display the same S-Parameter on one or more channels. You can control the four channels separately for some functions and parameters, while others must be the same for all channels. The parameters that can be different for the different channels are as follows:
Graph-Type (Rectilinear, Polar, Or Smith Chart)
Amplitude Scales
Reference Delay Setting
Normalization Memory
S-Parameters
The parameters that must be the same for all four channels are as follows:
Start and Stop Frequencies
Error Correction Type
Calibration Type and Range
Averaging
IF Bandwidth
Smoothing
Marker Frequencies, Times, Distances
b. Display of Messages
The 360 displays on-screen text giving error and other messages. This text concisely states the condition causing the message, specifies an action needed, or both.
c. Active Parameter
The active parameter is the only one that you can change using the Data Entry keys or knob. We define a parameter as a frequency, time, degree, distance, or other numeric value that you can enter. (You enter a parameter using the keypad or knob and end it using one of the Terminator keys (See Appendix page 6 (App. 6)). You open such a parameter for modification by pointing a menu cursor at it. That makes it active. You close a parameter by moving the cursor away from it. Or, alternatively, you erase or replace the menu.
Stored Data
The 360 can store control panel setups along with normalization, measurement, and calibration data. The following is a list of the items saved. (The 360 saves these parameters for all active channels.)
a. Display Parameters
Offset
Resolution
Reference Line
Limits (Enabled, On/Off/Values)
Minimum and Maximum Values
Selected S-Parameter
Display Type
Active Channel
Display Mode
S-Parameter For Each Channel
Blank Frequency Display Active, Color Plane
Reference Delay
Dielectric Used
Dielectric Constant
Normalize Mode
b. Measurement Parameters
Start of Sweep
End of Sweep
Source Power and Attenuator Settings
Frequency Resolution
Device-Under-Test ID
c. Enhancement
Smoothing Enabled
Averaging Enabled
Smoothing % of Sweep
Number of Points Averaged
IF Bandwidth
d. Output
Type of Output
Options Enabled (Model, Device ID, Date, Operator)
Resolution
e. Calibration
Size
Frequencies
Port Connector Type
Calibration Type
Correction Type
Load Type
Capacitance Coefficient for Connector
Connector Offset Length for Each Port
f. Miscellaneous
Markers (Enabled, On/Off, Values)
Delta Reference Mode
Marker Frequencies, Times, Distances
GPIB Addresses and Termination Unit
g. Disk Identification
Calibration File Name
h. Control Panel Setups
You can store the instrument state (measurement parameters and operating modes) in internal non-volatile memory or on the installed disk. You select the storage media using the SAVE/RECALL MENU key and its related menus. You can save up to four control panel setups, along with calibration data, in internal memory and more on the disk. Additionally, the 360 saves certain parameters each time you turn it off. It automatically saves (1) the current control panel setup, (2) all measurement, display, calibration, and other parameters and functions. This allows it to return to its exact same state when powered up next.
i. Normalization Memory
The 360 can store up to four channels of normalization data (S-Parameter measurements) in volatile RAM. To prevent loss of this data when you turn the system off, you may also save it to the disk.
j. Measured Data
You can also save measured data on the disk. The 360 stores it as ASCII-encoded test. The format is the same as that used for the tabular printout. This feature lets you make the computer analysis of the measured data, provided your computer has a compatible disk drive.
k. Calibration Data
The 12-term error correction coefficients for each data point covered by the calibration being saved are stored as 12 single precision (32-bit real, 32-bit imaginary) complex numbers. This results in 96 bytes per point, or 48 KBytes for a 51 point calibration.
External and Peripheral Interfaces
a. Microfloppy Disks
The 360 employs an integrally mounted disk drive for 31/2 inch microfloppy disks.
b. GPIB Interface
The 360 has two GPIB interfaces:Source Control (Master) and System Control (Slave). You can program each of these interfaces for address, delimiting character, etc. using a menu. The 360 provides GPIB status in a menu.
GPIB Specifications are as follows:
Interface
IEEE-488 standard GPIB
System Interface: IEEE-488 port used exclusively by the 360 to control and extract information from a Model 360SSXX frequency source.
Addressing: Controller is address=0 and source is address=5. Addresses are settable by menu; for the 360SSXX, it is also settable from the rear panel.
Speed: 200 .mu.s/bus cycle (device dependent).
Interface Function codes: SH1, AH1, T8, TE0, L4, LE0, SR0, RL0, PP0, DT0, DC0, C1, C2, C3, C27.
360 GPIB (System Control or Slave)
Interface: IEEE-488 standard GPIB
System Interface: IEEE-488 port by which an external controller may take control of the 360. The controller can perform all control panel operations.
Addressing: Defaults to address 6, settable by menu control.
c. Parallel Printer Port
The printer port is compatible with a standard "Centronics" interface. The 360 has the capability for an exact pixel-by-pixel dump of the CRT screen, when used with the WILTRON model 2225C inkjet printer. The output can be any of the following.
1. A full-screen dump.
2. A data-display dump that does not reproduce the menu.
3. A tabulated listing of the data.
d. Test Set Control Interface
The Power and Data interfaces use 37-pin "D" subminiature connectors. The Signal and RF interfaces use 17-pin, coaxial "D" subminiature connectors.
e. Video Interface
The 360 provides two video outputs, as follows:
1. Composite Monochrome Output. This output has rear-panel screwdrive adjustments for relative mix levels of red, green, and blue. You can adjust the mix to display shades of gray on an external monitor. 2. Separate R-G-B, TTL Level Outputs. You control the level using the same adjustment as for 1, above. Additionally, the 360 has positive-true and negative-true horizontal and vertical drive signals available. All video signals are nominally either TTL levels or 1-volt, zero-to-peak-into-75-ohm levels. The signals appear on a dedicated 15-pin "D" subminiature connector mounted on the rear panel. The composite video is also available on the RCA-type phono connector.
MODEL 360 CONTROL PANEL CONTROLS
FIG. 52 illustrates the control panel layout.
1. LINE ON/OFF
Turns the 360 on and off. When pressed ON, the program runs a self test then recalls the parameters and functions in effect when powered down last.
2. GPIB INDICATORS
REMOTE
Lights when the 360 goes under GPIB control. IT remains lit until the unit returns to local control.
TALK
Lights when you address the 360 to talk and remains lit until unaddressed.
LISTEN
Lights when you address the 360 to listen and remains lit until unaddressed.
SRQ
Lights when the 360 requests service from the controller (sends out a SRQ). The LED remains lit until the 360 receives a serial poll or until the controller resets the SRQ function.
LOCAL LOCKOUT
Lights when a local lockout message is received. The LED remains lit until the message is rescinded. When lit, you cannot return the 360 to local control via the front panel.
3. SAVE/RECALL MENU
Displays the first of three-menus that let you save the current calibration or control panel setup or recall a previously saved calibration or setup.
4. BEGIN CAL
Calls up the first in a sequence of menus that guide you through a measurement calibration. See below for a detailed discussion of the calibration keys, indicators, and menus.
5. CALIBRATION Indicators
Shows the calibration state of the 360.
6. APPLY CAL
Turns on and off the applied error correction displayed by the calibration indicators.
7. MENU
The .uparw. key moves the menu cursor up and the .dwnarw. key moves it down to select between entries appearing in the menu area of the CRT.
8. ENTER
Implements the menu selection chosen using the MENU arrow keys.
9. ROTARY KNOB
Used to alter measurement values for the active parameter (Start Frequency, Stop Frequency, Offset, etc).
10. DISPLAY Keys
GRAPH TYPE: Displays either of two menus that let you choose the type of display and its S-parameter that appears for the active channel.
SET SCALE: Displays the appropriate scaling menu, based on the type of graph and its S-parameter being displayed for the active channel.
AUTO SCALE: Automatically scales the active channel for optimum viewing.
S-PARAMS: Displays Menu SP, which lets you choose between S.sub.11, S.sub.12, S.sub.21, or S.sub.22. You may display the same parameter on two or more channels.
REF DELAY: Displays the first of two menus that let you enter a reference-delay in time or distance. For a correct distance readout, you must set the dielectric constant to the correct value. Refer to the discussion in Menu RD2.
TRACE MEMORY: Displays a menu that lets you do one of the following. (1) Store the measured data in memory. (2) View the stored data. (3) Add, subtract, multiply, or divide the measured data from the stored data (normalize to the stored memory). (4) View both the measured and the stored data simultaneously on the active channel. Four memories exist--one for each channel. This lets you normalize the data in each channel independently. The LED on this button lights only when the active channel is displaying measurement data normalized to memory.
11. KEYPAD
Provides for entering values for the active parameter. The active parameter is the one to which the menu cursor is pointing.
12. ENHANCEMENT Keys and LED
IF BW: Cycles between NORMAL, REDUCED, and MINIMUM intermediate frequency (IF) bandwidths. The appropriate indicator lights to display the selected value.
AVG/SMOOTH MENU: Displays a menu that lets you enter values for AVERAGING and SMOOTHING.
OPTION MENU: Displays a menu showing the choice of options installed. (This key is not active unless you have options other than Time Domain installed).
TRACE SMOOTH: Turns the trace smoothing function on and off.
AVERAGE: Turns the averaging function on and off.
13. TERMINATOR Keys
Ghz/10.sup.3 /.mu.s/m: Terminates a value entered on the keypad in the units shown--that is; gigahertz for frequency, 1.times.10.sup.-3 power for dimensionless or angle entries, microseconds for time, or meters for length.
Mhz/X1 /ns/cm: Terminates a value entered on the keypad in the units shown--that is; megahertz for frequency, unity for dimensionless or angle entries, nanoseconds for time, or centimeters for length.
Khz/10.sup.-3 /ps/mm: Terminates a value entered on the keypad in the units shown--that is; kilohertz for frequency, 1.times.10.sup.-3 power for dimensionless or angle entries, picoseconds for time, or millimeters for length.
CLEAR/RET LOC
a. Local (Non-GPIB) Mode: (1) The key clears entries not yet terminated by one of the terminator keys above, which allows the previously displayed values to redisplay. Or (2) the key turns off the displayed menu, if you have not made any keypad entries needing termination.
b. GPIB Mode: The key returns the instrument to local (control panel) control, unless the controller has sent a local lockout message (LLO) over the bus.
14. DISK DRIVE
Provides a drive for the 31/2 inch floppy disk used to store both the operating system and the selected front panel setups and calibration. Refer to paragraphs 3-6 for a detailed description.
15. OUTPUT Keys
MENU: Displays option menus that let you define what will happen each time you press the START
PRINT key. The displayed menu also selects disk I/O operations.
START PRINT: Tells the printer or plotter to start output based on the current selections or plotting.
STOP PRINT: Immediately stops printing the data, clears the print buffer, and sends a form-feed command to the printer. However, if the printer is not then printing data, the key only sends a form-feed command.
16. MEASUREMENT Keys and LED
SETUP MENU: Displays the first of three menus that let you enter start/stop frequencies, source power, and attenuation values.
DEVICE ID: Displays a menu asking you to name the test device.
DATA POINTS: Cycles between maximum, normal, and minimum resolution values. The appropriate MAXIMUM, NORMAL, or MINIMUM switch indicator lights to display the selected value.
DOMAIN: Displays the first of the menus that let you set the Time Domain display parameters. (This key is only active if you have the Time Domain option).
(1) If already in the DOMAIN menus, pressing this key will return to the first menu in the sequence.
(2) If in the DOMAIN menus and another (non-time domain) menu is displayed by pushing a menu key, the last displayed time domain menu redisplays when the DOMAIN key is next pressed.
HOLD: Toggles the instrument in and out of the hold mode or triggers a sweep, depending on the function selected in menu SU4.
17. SYSTEM STATE Keys
DEFAULT PROGRAM: Resets the control panel to the factory-preset state and displays Menu SU1.
CAUTION
Use of this key will destroy control panel and calibration setup data, unless they have been saved to disk.
UTILITY MENU: Displays the first in a series of menus that let you perform diskette and other utility-type functions and operations.
18. MARKERS/LIMITS Keys
MARKER MENU: Displays the first in a series of menus that let you set and manipulate marker frequencies, times, and distances.
READOUT MARKER: Displays a menu that lists all of the active markers. If no markers are active, the message "NO ACTIVE MARKERS" displays for four seconds in the message area of the screen.
LIMITS: Displays one of the menus that let you manipulate the Limit 1 and Limit 2 lines displayed on the CRT.
19. CHANNELS Keys
CHANNEL MENU: Displays a menu that lets you display format for the channels,
CH 1: Makes Channel 1 the active channel. The active channel is the one acted on by the keys in the DISPLAY section. Only one channel can be active at any one time.
CH 2: Makes Channel 2 the active channel.
CH 3: Makes Channel 3 the active channel.
CH 4: Makes Channel 4 the active channel.
20. CRT Display
Displays any or all of the four measurement channels.
CALIBRATION Keys and Indicators
FIG. 53 illustrates the calibration keys.
a. BEGIN CAL Key
This key displays a menu that lets you initiate the calibration sequence. That is, to begin a sequence of steps that corrects for errors inherent in a 2-port measurement setup.
b. APPLY CAL Key
This key turns on and off the error correction that you may apply to the displayed channel (s) using the currently valid error-correction indicator.
C. CALIBRATION Indicators
FULL 12 TERM: You have corrected for all twelve error terms associated with a two-port measurement.
NOTE
Choosing this calibration in Menu C5 corrects for all possible measurement error terms.
1 PATH, 2 PORT: You have corrected for the four forward-direction error terms (E.sub.DF, E.sub.SF, E.sub.RF, and E.sub.TF).
FREQ RESPONSE: You have corrected for one or both of the forward-direction error terms associated with a measurement of S.sub.11 and S.sub.21. This is a subset of the 12-term calibration.
REFLECTION ONLY: You have corrected for the three error terms associated with an S.sub.11 measurement (E.sub.DF, E.sub.SF, and E.sub.RF). This is a subset of the 12-term calibration.
NONE: No calibration data currently exists.
Calibration Menus
(The Calibration Sequence consists of several menus, similar in structure but different in content. The content differs only in the type of device (load, open, or short) the menus say to connect to ports 1 and 2. The menus automatically appear in a sequence based on choices made C7A through L. Each menu will specify a type of device to be connected to ports 1 and 2 (FIG. 55) and each will provide a procedural message (one of the three types shown in Table 93B).)
Measurement calibration is aided by the step-by-step procedures contained in the calibration menus. FIG. 54 provides a flowchart describing the calibration sequence. Apps. 1-18 and FIGS. 53-57 describe the calibration menus.
SAVE/RECALL MENU Key And Menus
Pressing the SAVE/RECALL MENU key shown in FIG. 52 displays the first of four menus (Apps. 19 and 22) that allow you to save or recall control panel setups and calibration data.
MEASUREMENT Keys and Menus
SETUP Key
Pressing the measurement keys shown in FIG. 52 calls Sweep Setup Menu SU1 (SU3). Depending upon which menu items you select, additional menus SU2 thru SU6 may also be called. Apps. 23-28 describe the six menus.
DEVICE ID Key
Pressing this key calls a menu that lets you name the test device. This key has the same effect as selecting "Device ID" in the PM2 menu.
c. HOLD Key
If the instrument is sweeping, pressing this key results in the immediate halt of the sweep at the current data point. The LED on the button lights, indicating that the Hold Mode is active.
The instrument may be taken out of the hold mode as follows:
1. By using any of the options described in Menu SU4, Select Function for Hold Button.
2. By pressing the Default Program button. This causes the 360 to revert to a predefined state.
3. By pressing the Begin Cal button. This causes the 360 to resume sweeping and begin the Calibration Menu sequence.
NOTE
See App. 26 (Menu SU4) for a description of the interaction between the Hold Mode and the selection of "Single Sweep" or "Restart Sweep".
If you restart the sweep after performing any disk operations in the Hold Mode (sweep stopped at some data point), the sweep restarts from the beginning.
d. DATA POINTS Key
Pressing this key toggles between MAXIMUM, NORMAL, and MINIMUM resolution, lighting the appropriate LED. If MAXIMUM resolution is X data points, MINIMUM resolution will be approximately X/6 data points and NORMAL resolution will be approximately X/3 data points. The nominal values are X=501, X/3=167 and X/6=85.
e. DOMAIN Key
See FIG. 52 for a full description. Additionally, if the Time Domain option is installed, making a selection other than "Frequency Domain" lets you display measured data in the time domain. It also calls a further sequence of Time Domain Menus. Menu TD1 and all other time domain menus, along with a discussion of the time domain measurement, are provided below.
CHANNEL Keys and Menu
a. CH 1-4 Keys
The channel keys shown in FIG. 52 define the active channel. One (and only one) must always be active as indicated by the associated LED. Pressing a button makes the indicated channel active. If it is already the active channel, pressing the key has no effect.
The active channel will be the channel acted upon by the S PARAMS, GRAPH TYPE, REF DELAY, TRACE MEMORY, SET SCALE, AUTO SCALE and DOMAIN keys. When in the single channel display mode, the active channel will be the one displayed.
b. CHANNEL Menu
Pressing this key calls menu CM (App. 29). Here, you select the number of channels to be displayed. When in the single display mode, only the active channel will be displayed.
DISPLAY Keys and Menus (See FIG. 52)
a. S PARAMS Key
Pressing this key calls menu SP (App. 30). This menu allows you to select the S-Parameter to be displayed by the active channel for the selected S-parameter.
b. GRAPH TYPE Key
Pressing this key calls menu GT1 or GT2 (Apps. 31 or 32). These menus let you select the type of display to appear on the active channel for the selected S-parameter.
c. SET SCALE Key
Pressing this key calls the appropriate scaling menu (SSn) depending upon the graph type being displayed on the active channel for the selected S-parameter.
d. REF DELAY Key
Pressing this key calls menu RD1 (App. 36). This menu lets you input the reference delay in time or distance. You do this by selecting the appropriate menu item. For a correct distance readout, the dielectric constant must be set to the correct value. This is accomplished by selecting "SET DIELECTRIC", which calls menu RD2 (App. 37).
On menu RD1, selecting "AUTO" and pressing ENTER automatically adjusts the reference delay to unwind the phase. The values for time and distance turn red for one second when you activate "AUTO".
The 360 unwinds the phase as follows:
1. First, it sums the phase increments between each pair of measured data points, then it takes the average "P.sub.delta " over the entire set of points.
2. Next, it corrects the phase data by applying the following formula:
P.sub.correct =P.sub.measured --Nx.sub.delta (where P.sub.measured is the measured phase of the Nth data point).
Assuming there are fewer than 360 degrees of phase rotation between each data point, the above-described operation removes any net phase offset. The endpoints of the phase display then fall at the same phase value.
e. AUTO SCALE Key
Pressing this key autoscales the trace or traces of the active channel. When in one of the scaling menus, the 360 indicates this is happening by turning the menu entries red for 1 second. The new scaling values are then displayed on the menu and graticule. The resolution will be selected from the normal sequence of values you have available using the knob.
f. TRACE MEMORY Key
Pressing this key brings up menu NO1 (App. 33). This menu--which relates to the active channel--allows you to store data to memory, view memory, perform operations with the stored memory, and view both data and memory simultaneously. Four memories exist, one for each channel. This allows each channel to be stored and normalized independent of the other channels. Data from the trace memory may be stored in the disk or recalled from it. The SELECT TRACE MATH choice brings up menu NO2 (App. 34).
9. DISPLAY Menus
Apps. 30-37 show the menus associated with the GRAPH TYPE, S PARAMS, and REF DELAY keys. Apps. 38 and 39 show two menus that are representative of the twelve associated with the SET SCALE key.
ENHANCEMENT Keys and Menus (See FIG. 52)
a. OPTION MENU Key
This key is reserved for future options.
b. AVG/SMOOTH MENU Key
Pressing this key brings up the EM Menu (App. 40). When pressed during calibration sequence, it brings up the EM Cal Menu (App. 41) instead.
c. TRACE SMOOTH and AVERAGE Keys
The AVERAGE and TRACE SMOOTH keys select their respective functions on and off with the appropriate LED indicating when the function is selected.
d. IF BW Key
Pressing this key cycles between three different IF bandwidths. The applicable NORMAL, REDUCED, or MINIMUM LED lights to indicate selection.
OUTPUT Keys and Menus (See FIG. 52)
a. MENU Key
Pressing this key brings up menu PM1 (App. 42). This menu allows you to define what will happen every time you press the START PRINT key. Apps. 42-45 describe the menu options.
b. START PRINT Key
Pressing this key starts outputting the measured data as defined by the setup defined by the selected MENU key.
c. STOP PRINT Key
Pressing this key can result in any of the following actions if the printer is selected:
If the 360 is not outputting data, the key sends a form feed command to the printer.
If the printer is active, the key aborts the printing and sends a form feed command to the printer. Aborting the printing clears the print buffer.
Pressing this key if the printer is not selected and another form of output is active, the key aborts it but does not send a form feed to the printer.
d. PLOTTING FUNCTIONS
The 360 can plot an image of either the entire screen or subsets of it. Plots can be either full sizes or they can be quarter size and located in any of the four quadrants. You can select different pens for plotting different parts of the screen. You cannot, however, plot tabular data. The menus for selecting plotter functions are shown in Apps. 46-48.
SYSTEM STATE Keys and Menus (See FIG. 52)
a. DEFAULT PROGRAM Key
Pressing this key brings up the default menu. If pressed again, it recalls the factory selected default values for the control panel controls. The values are defined in Table 3-1.
C A U T I O N
Use of this key will destroy control panel and calibration set up data, unless they have been saved to disk.
TABLE 3-1______________________________________Default SettingsFunction Default Setting______________________________________Instrument Measurement Setup Menu DisplayedStateMeasurement Maximum sweep range of source and test set Source Power 0.0 dBm Resolution: NormalChannel (Quad (four-channel) display Channel 1 activeDisplay Channel 1: S.sub.11, 1:1 Smith Chart Channel 2: S.sub.12, Log Magnitude and Phase Channel 3: S.sub.21, Log Magnitude and Phase Channel 4: S.sub.22, 1:1 Smith Chart Scale: 10 dB/Division or 90.degree./Division Offset: 0.000 dB or 0.00 degree Reference Position: Midscale Electrical Delay: 0.00 seconds Dielectric: 1.00 (air) Normalization: Off Normalization Sets: UnchangedEnhancement Video IF Bandwidth: Reduced Averaging: Off Smoothing: OffCalibration Correction: Off Connector: SMA Load: BroadbandMarkers Limits Markers On/Off: All off Markers Enabled/Disabled: All enabled Marker Frequency: All set to the start-sweep frequency, or start-time distance .DELTA.Reference: OffSystem State Limits: All set to reference position value: all off, all enabled) GPIB Addresses and Terminators: Unchanged Frequency Blanking: Disengaged Error(s): All cleared Measurement: RestartedOutput Output Type: Printer (full screen, clear headers) Marker and Sweep Data: Enabled______________________________________
b. UTILITY MENU Key
Pressing this key calls menu U1. This menu accesses subordinate menus to perform system, disk, and service utilities, as described by the flowchart in FIG. 58. The only functions performed directly from the U1 Menu are "Blank Frequency Information" and "Alternate Third Color Pen" (blue or cyan).
c. UTILITY MENU Key Menus
Apps. 50-55 describe the UTILITY MENU Key menus.
Disk Storage Interface and
General Purpose Menus
a. The 360 has an integrally mounted disk drive of the 31/2 inch removable media type. The format, files and directory are compatible with PC(MS)-DOS, Version 3.2.
1. Disk Format. Disks are MS-DOS compatible. The 360 formats them to have 80 data tracks per side on 2 sides, with 9 sectors of 512 bytes per sector. This yields a total of 720 K Bytes per disk. Any of the following file types, in any combination may be stored on the disk. Table 3-2 shows these file extensions.
TABLE 3-2______________________________________File ExtensionsFile Type File Extension______________________________________Calibration, Normal .CALTrace Memory .NRMMeasured Data .DATProgram (no extension)______________________________________
2. Disk Files. You may find any of the following file-types on the 360 disk.
a. Program Files. These are binary files used to load the operating program. Application-type programs cannot read them.
b. Calibration Data Files: These are binary files used to store and retrieve calibration and other data. Application-type programs cannot read them. File size depends on calibration type. For example, 58 KBytes for 123 term and 501 points.
c. Measured Data Files. These are ASCII files used to store actual measurement data. They can be read by application-type programs. File size depends on selected operations. For example, 25.6 KBytes for 501 points and 1 S-Parameter.
d. Trace Memory Files. These are data stored in a display, rather than in a floating-point format. Application-type programs cannot read them. You use them to perform trace math operations on data. File sizes is 4 KBytes.
b. Disk User Interface
A disk is capable of holding up to 720K bytes of data. Using the data size assumptions above, a disk would be capable of holding:
12-Plus Calibration and Front Panel Setups or
180 Sets of Normalization Data or 28-Plus Sets of Measurement Data
You can also store a downloaded operating program on the disk. However, this reduces the number of the above items that you could store. The disk format imposes a limitation of 112 on the total number of data items. This means the full 360 sets of normalization data could not be stored on the disk.
c. Disk and General Purpose Menus
1. Disk Menus. A set of DSK menus used to implement the disk functions are provided in Apps. 56-61.
2. General Purpose Menus. The menus shown in Apps. 62-64 appear as a result of choices made in certain of the Disk and Print menus.
Marker/Limits Keys and Menus (See FIG. 52)
a. Marker Menu Key
Pressing the MARKER MENU key calls Menu M1 (App. 65). This menu lets you toggle markers on and off and set marker frequencies, times or distances.
b. Marker Readout Key
1. Pressing this key calls menu M3 (App. 67) under the following conditions.
(a) If the .DELTA. Reference mode is off and
(1) there is no selected marker, or
(2) the selected marker is not in the sweep range.
(b) If the .DELTA. Reference mode is on and
(1) the .DELTA. Reference marker is not in the sweep range, or
(2) no Delta ref marker has been selected.
2. Pressing this key calls menu M4 (App. 68) if the .DELTA. Reference mode is off and the selected marker is in the current sweep rate (or time/distance).
3. Pressing this key calls menu M5 (App. 69) if the .DELTA. Reference mode and marker are both on and the .DELTA. Reference marker is in the selected sweep rate (or time/distance).
c. Markers Keys Menus
The menus associated with the two MARKERS keys are described in Apps. 65-69.
d. Limit Frequency Readout Function
The 360 is equipped with a Limit-Frequency Readout function. This function allows dB values to be read at a specified point (such as the 3 dB point) on the data trace. This function is only available for certain rectilinear graph-types. These graph-types are listed below.
1. Log Magnitude
2. Log Magnitude and Phase
3. Phase
4. Linear Magnitude And Phase
5. SWR
6. Group Delay
App. 70 shows an example of a Limit Frequency (LF) menu.
e. Limits Key
Pressing this key calls the appropriate Limit (Ln) menu. The Limit menus are described in Apps. 71-81.
ERROR AND STATUS MESSAGES
Error and status messages are described below.
Message Types
The basic types of messages are categorized by the first digit of their code number, as follows:
______________________________________000-099 Power Up Self Diagnostic 000-091 Main #2 020-039 Main #1 040-049 IO Proc 050-099 Analog Hardware100-199 System Status 100-109 Program Load110-129 Program Initialization 130-149 Disk Related 150-169 Peripheral Related200-299 Front Panel Operations300-399 Measurement Related400-499 GPIB______________________________________
Fatal Errors
Some errors are "fatal" in that they cause the instrument to terminate operations until you correct the condition causing the error. These errors are listed with an "X" in the column below marked "FATAL".
Message Definitions
Table 3-3 provides a listing of error message definitions.
TABLE 3.3__________________________________________________________________________Error Codes and Status MessagesCode Message Text Fatal Meaning__________________________________________________________________________Self Test, Main Microprocessor #2000 FiFO RESET FAILURE X FiFO failed to reset, PCB A12002 PROM CHECKSUM FAILURE #2 X Prom failure, PCB A12003 BATTERY BACKED RAM FAILURE X Non volatile RAM failure, PCB A12004 EXTENDED MEMORY FAILURE X Failure in the extended memory, PCB A12005 DYNAMIC RAM FAILURE #2 X Dynamic RAM failure, PCB A12006 TIMER FAILURE #2 X Programmable timer failure, PCB A12007 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER FAILURE #2 X Interrupt controller failure PCB A12008 NUMERIC PROCESSOR FAILURE #2 X Numeric processor failure, PCB A12009 FRONT PANEL INTERFACE FAILURE X Interface failure, front panel, PCB A12010 PRINTER INTERFACE FAILURE X Printer interface failure PCB A12Self Test, Main Microprocessor #1020 FiFO TO #2 FAILED RESET X Interface failure to FiFO, PCB A12022 FiFO TO I/O FAILED RESET Interface failure with FiFO PCB A13023 PTOM VHRVKDUM GSILUTR 31 X Checksum error, PROM PCB A13024 DYNAMIC RAM FAILURE #1 X Dynamic RAM failure, PCB A13025 TIMER FAILURE #1 X Programmable timer failure PCB A13026 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER FAILURE 31 X Interrupt Controller failure PCB A13027 DISK DRIVE CONTROLLER FAILURE Disk drive controller failure, PCB A13028 DISK DRIVE FAILURE Disk drive SEEK failure, PCB A13029 NUMERIC PROCESSOR FAILURE 31 X 8087 math coprocessor failure030 PROM CARTRIDGE CHECKSUM PROM cartridge failure PCB A13 ERROR031 DISK DRIVE NOT READY FOR TEST Diskette is not in disk drive040 PROM CHECKSUM FAILURE I/O X PROM failure, PCB A11041 RAM FAILURE I/O X RAM failure, PCB A11042 TIMER/INTERRUPT LOOPBACK X Programmable timer failure, PCB A11 FAILURE043 GPIB INTERFACE FAILURE I/O GPIB failure, PCB A11044 FiFO FAILURE I/O X FiFO failure, PCB A11050 A1 COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE L01 Phase Lock PCB Error051 A2 COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE L02 Phase Lock PCB Failure052 A3 COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE Cal/Third Local Oscillator PCB Failure053 A4 COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE Analog to digital PCB failure054 A5 COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE 10 MHz Reference PDB failure055 A6 COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE Source lock PCB failure056 A10 COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE Bandswitch blank/sync PCB057 8 BIT A/D CONVERTER FAILURE Failure A/D PCB A4058 STEERING DAC FAILURE Failure A/D PCB A4059 12 BIT A/D OR STEERING DAC Failure A/D PCB A4 FAILURE060 TEST SET NOT CONNECTED OR NOT General failure of test set WORKING061 TEST SET CHAN A CAL PHASING Test set CHAN A failure FAILURE062 TEST SET CHAN A CAL LEVEL Test set CHAN A failure FAILURE063 TEST SET CHAN A GAIN FAILURE Test set CHAN A failure064 TEST SET CHAN A PHASE RANGING Test set CHAN a failure FAILURE065 TEST SET CHAN B CAL PHASING Test set CHAN B failure FAILURE067 TEST SET CHAN B GAIN FAILURE Test set CHAN B failure068 TEST SET CHAN B PHASE RANGING Test set CHAN B failure FAILURE069 TEST SET REF CHAN CAL PHASING Test set REF CHAN failure FAILURE070 TEST SET REF CHAN CAL LEVEL Test set REF CHAN failure FAILURE071 TEST SET REF CHAN GAIN FAILURE Test set REF CHAN failure072 TEST SET REF CHAN PHASE Test set REF CHAN failure RANGINGSystem Status, Program Load100 DISK DRIVE NOT READY X Program failed to load from disk, (disk installed)101 PROGRAM DATA ERROR X Program failed to load from disk102 PROGRAM FILE MISSING Loader cold not find system files103 DISK ERROR The 360 is unable to read the diskette104 UNKNOWN DISK ERROR loader failed a consistency check105 PROGRAM DATA ERROR ON #2 Program for processor #2 failed to loadProgram initialization110 SOURCE ID FAILURE No sweeper ID on GPIB; sweeper may not be connected111 TEST SET NOT CONNECTED X Initialization detects a discrepancy.112 TEST SET FREQ. RANGE DOES NOT X Initialization detects a discrepancy. MATCH SOURCE113 CAL DATA NOT FOUND; CHANGE File not found on disk with name matching DISK AND PRESS <ENTER> that in battery pack RAM.114 PROGRAM ERROR X Program corrupted.115 PROCESSOR COM ERROR X FiFO Synch problem Disk Related.Program Initialization, Disk Related131 DISK READ ERROR Hard error reading from disk132 DISK WRITE ERROR Hard error writing to disk133 FILE DELETION ERROR Write protect tab is in "read only" position.134 DISK NOT READY Disk not in unit or not formatted135 DISK WRITE PROTECTED Write protect tab is in "read only" position.136 OUT OF DISK SPACE Disk file space full137 FILE IS INCOMPATIBLE File is not a 360 data or program file.138 NO SPACE FOR NEW DATA FILE Disk file space full139 FILE MARKED READ ONLY Read-only attribute set on file140 NO FILES REMAIN TO OVERWRITE All files of the type have been deleted.141 NO FILES REMAIN TO DELETE All files of the type have been deleted.Program initialization, Peripheral170 PRINTER NOT READY Printor "off line" or not connected.171 PLOTTER NOT READY Plotter "off line" or not connected.Control Panel200 SELECTED FREQUENCY OUT OF CAL Cal. range does not include selected RANGE frequency.201 MARKERS SELECTED FOR READOUT Sweep range doos not include selected NOT ACTIVE IN SWEEP RANGE frequency.208 OUT OF RANGE Attempted to enter an out-of-range parameter.209 START GREATER THAN STOP Attempted to a set start frequency that was greater than the stop frequency.210 OUT OF RANGE .20 PERCENT MAX Attempted to enter a smoothing or group delay factor that was greater than 20%.213 OUT OF H/W RANGE Attempted to enter a frequency that is outside of the system hardware range.216 TOO MANY POINTS. Attempted to set too many discrete frequency points.217 TOO FEW POINTS 2 MINIMUM Attempted to set too few discrete frequency points.219 DISCRETE FREQS LOST Setup changed in N-discrete frequency mode.220 OUT OF SWEEP RANGE Attempt to set marker outside sweep range.221 OPTION NOT INSTALLED The selected option is not installed.222 MEAS. DATA NOT AVAILABLE FOR No measured data on channel to be stored. STORAGE223 NO STORED MEMORY DATA No data available in memory for channel.224 SYSTEM BUS ADDRESSES MUST BE Attempt to set GPIB addresses to same UNIQUE value.225 MEMORY LOCATION no cal exists.226 MEMORY LOCATION CORRUPTED Saved state data is invalid227 SETUP INCONSISTENT RECALL Saved state not compatible with hardware ABORTED or software versions228 WINDOW TOO SMALL Attempt to set start greater than or equal to stop.229 OUT OF WINDOW RANGE Attempt to set marker outside start to stop range.230 ATTENUATOR UNAVAILABLE Selected attenuators not available in test set231 START MUST BE LESS THAN STOP Attempt to set start greater than or equal to stop in marker sweep.232 ILLEGAL IN C.W. MODE Attempt to readout limit frequency.233 ILLEGAL IN TIME DOMAIN Attempt to readout limit frequency.234 BOTH LIMITS MUST BE ON Attempt to readout limit frequency.235 Stop is Over Range Discrete fill parameters cause stop to go over hardware range.238 Out of Range 10% Minimum Attempt to set pen speed to below 10%270 UNCALIBRATED Channel has S parameter for which calibration does not exist.271 PRINTER NOT READY Printer not connected or paper out.272 TOO MUCH PRINT DATA Print buffer is full. Reduce number of channels or data points.273 PLOTTER NOT READY Plotter not connected.280 CAL INVALID Calibration is incorrect for S parameter displayed.281 TIME DOMAIN INVALID time domain cannot be used in current setup282 GROUP DELAY INVALID Group delay cannot be used in current setup283 GATE MUST BE ON Time Gate with gate off.284 SMOOTHING INVALID Attempt to use smoothing while in C.W. mode285 MEMORY DATA INVALID Setup has changed since data was stored.Measurement Related300 LOW IF Insufficient signal level detected: Device under test may not be connected.301 LOCK FAILURE RF source failed to lock to reference oscillator in 360 testset302 A/D FAILURE Analog to Digital convertor not functioning in 360 mainframe.303 RF OVERLOAD Test signal level is too high: reduce source level or add attenuation310 SWPR ID FAILURE Communications lost with RF source311 SWPR SELF TEST FAILURE RF source failed power on self test program312 NO TEST SET Test set not connected. Reconnect and cycle power to clearGPIB Related400 GPIB ERROR Data transmission error on__________________________________________________________________________ GPIB
Ill CONTROL PANEL OPERATION
DATA DISPLAYS
Display Modes and Examples
The 360 displays measurement data using a "Channel Concept." This means that each channel can display a different S-Parameter and a different graph type for each S-Parameter. As you select each channel the graph type, scaling, reference delay, S-Parameter, etc. associated with that channel appear on the screen. You can display the same S-Parameter on two or more channels. FIG. 59 shows the possible displays.
Graph Types
Several graph-types are possible: polar, rectilinear, Smith chart. The rectilinear graph-type may be magnitude, phase, magnitude and phase, SWR, group delay, real, imaginary, and real and imaginary. The Smith chart graph-type is one specifically designed to plot complex impedances.
a. Graph Data Types
The data types (real, imaginary, magnitude, phase) used in the displayed graph-types reflect the possible ways in which S-Parameter data can be represented in polar, Smith, or rectilinear graphs. For example: Complex data--that is, data in which both phase and magnitude are graphed--may be represented and displayed in any of the ways shown below.
1. Complex Impedance; displayed on a Smith chart graph.
2. Real and imaginary; displayed on a real and imaginary graph.
3. Phase and magnitude components; displayed on a rectilinear (Cartesian) or polar graph.
In addition to the above, the 360 can display the data as a group delay plot. In this graph-type, the group-delay measurement units are time. Those of the associated aperture are frequency and SWR. The quantity group delay is displayed using a modified rectilinear-magnitude format. In this format the vertical scale is in linear units of time (ps-ns-.mu.s). With one exception, the reference-value and -line functions operate the same as they do with a normal magnitude display. The exception is that they appear in units of time instead of magnitude.
Frequency Markers
a. Marker Annotation
FIG. 60 shows how the 360 annotates markers for the different graph-types. Each marker is identified with its own number. When a marker reaches the top of its graticule, it will flip over and its number will appear below the symbol.
When markers approach the same frequency, they will overlap. Their number will appear as close to the marker as possible without overlapping.
Details of the method whereby the system 100 of the present invention displays Markers is described in the commonly assigned co-pending Patent Application entitled, METHOD OF DISPLAYING GRAPHS WITH MARKERS, invented by David Peter Finch, having Ser. No. 176,097, filed on the same date as this Application and which is hereby expressly incorporated herein in its entirety.
b. Marker Designation
Depending on menu selection, you may designate a marker as the "active" or the "delta reference" marker. If you choose a marker to be active--indicated by its number being enclosed in a square box--you may change its frequency or time (distance) with the Data Entry keypad or knob. If you have chosen it to be the delta-reference marker, a delta symbol (.DELTA.) appears one character space above the marker number (or one character space below a "flipped" marker). If the marker is both active and the delta reference marker, the number and the delta symbol appear above (below) the marker. The delta symbol appears above (below) the number.
Limits
Limit lines function as settable maximum and minimum indicators for the value of displayed data. These lines are settable in the basic units of the measurement on a channel-by-channel basis. If the display is rescaled the limit line(s) will move automatically and thereby maintain their correct value(s).
Each channel has two limit lines (four for dual displays), each of which may take on any value. Limit lines are either horizontal lines in rectilinear displays or concentric circles around the origin in Smith and polar displays.
Status Display
In addition to the graticules, data, markers, and marker annotation, the 360 displays certain instrument status information in the data display area. This information is described below.
a. Reference Position Marker
The Reference Position Marker indicates the location of the reference value. It is displayed at the left edge of each rectilinear graph-type. It consists of a triangular symbol identical to the cursor displayed in the menu area. You can center this symbol on one of the vertical graticule divisions and move it up or down using the "Reference Position" option. When you do this, the data trace will follow this marker. If you also select the value option; the marker will remain stationary and the trace will move with the maximum allowable resolution. When changing from a full-screen display or a half- or quarter-screen display, the marker will stay as close to the same position as possible.
b. Analog Instrument Status
The 360 displays analog-instrument-status messages (in red when appropriate) in the upper right corner of the data-display area (FIG. 61). They appear in the same vertical position as line 2 of the menu area. If more than one message appears, they stack up below that line.
c. Measurement Status
The 360 displays measurement-status messages (in red when appropriate) in the upper-right corner of the graticule (channel) to which they apply.
d. Sweep Indicator Marker
The sweep indicator marker (FIG. 61) indicates the progress of the current sweep. When measuring quiet data, that is, data having few or no perturbations, this indicator assures that the instrument is indeed sweeping.
The indicator, a blue horizontal line segment 15 pixels long by 1 pixel high, appears along the bottom edge of the data display area. Its position is proportional to the number of data points measured in the current sweep. When this sweep completes, the line segment will have traveled the full width of the data display area. If the sweep should stop for some reason, the position of the indicator will stop changing until the sweep resumes.
Data Display Control
a. Active Channel Selection
FIG. 62 shows the algorithm that the 360 uses to display the active channel.
b. S-Parameter Selection
If you select a new S-Parameter using Menu SP (App. 30), it appears on the then-active channel in the same graph-type it was displayed-in last. Table 3-4 shows the displayable S-Parameters based on the type of correction you have in place. If you attempt to display other S-Parameters, an error message displays. In cases when there is no last-displayed S-Parameter stored, the display will default as shown in the Table 3-4.
TABLE 3-4______________________________________Display Types and Defaults by Correction Type Displayable DefaultsCorrection Type S-Parameters CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4______________________________________None All S.sub.11 S.sub.12 S.sub.21 S.sub.22Frequency ResponseTransmission S21 S.sub.21 S.sub.21 S.sub.21 S.sub.21Reflection Sl1 S.sub.11 S.sub.11 S.sub.11 S.sub.11Both S11, S21 S.sub.11 S.sub.11 S.sub.21 S.sub.211-Path, 2-Port S11, S21 S.sub.11 S.sub.11 S.sub.21 S.sub.2112-Term All S.sub.11 S.sub.12 S.sub.21 S.sub.22Reflection Only S11 S.sub.11 S.sub.11 S.sub.11 S.sub.11______________________________________
If you select an S-Parameter (or if the 360 defaults to one) for which there was no last-displayed graph-type, the display defaults to the following:
S.sub.21 and S.sub.12 : Log Magnitude and Phase
S.sub.11 and S.sub.22 : Smith.
c. Data Display Update
When you change a control panel parameter that affects the appearance of the display, the entire display changes immediately to reflect that change. For example, if you press AUTOSCALE, the entire display rescales immediately. You do not have to wait for the next sweep to see the results of the change.
The following parameters are supported for this feature:
Reference Delay, Offset, Scaling, Auto Scale, Auto
Reference Delay, Trace Math, IF BW, and Smoothing.
In the case of Averaging, the sweep restarts.
If the knob is used to vary any of the above parameters, the change occurs as the measurement progresses, that is, the continuing trace will reflect the new setting(s).
When you change a marker frequency or time (distance), the readout parameters will change. The changes reflect by the marker's new frequency, using data stored from the previous sweep.
d. Display of Markers
Once you have selected a marker display, it will always display. It does not matter what resolution you have selected. When you set a marker to another calibrated frequency the marker will continue to display. It will display even if its frequency is not consistent with the data points in the lower-resolution sweep.
e. Hard Copy and Disk Output
In addition to the CRT display, the Model 360 is capable of outputting measured data as a
1. tabular printout,
2. screen-image printout,
3. pen plot,
4. disk image of the tabular data values.
The selection and initiation of this output is controlled by the OUTPUT keys.
f. Tabular Printout
The tabular printout formats are used as follows:
1. Tabular Printout Format (FIG. 63): Used when printing three or four channels.
2. Alternate Data Format (FIG. 64): Used when printing one or two channels.
In tabular printouts, the 360 shifts the data columns to the left when an S-Parameter is omitted. Leading zeroes are always suppressed. The heading (Model, Device I/O, Date, Operator, Page) appears on each page. When using the 360SS sweeper, frequencies are in the format "XX.XXXX."
g. Screen-Image Printout
In a ScreenImage Printout, the exact data displayed on the screen is dumped to the printer. The dump is in the graphics mode, on a pixel by pixel basis. A header (FIG. 65) prints before the screen data prints.
h. Plotter Output
The protocol used to control plotters is "HP-GL" (Hewlett-Packard Graphics Language). HP-GL contains a comprehensive set of "vector graphics" type commands. These commands are explained in the Interfacing and Programming Manual for any current model Hewlett-Packard plotter, such as the 7470A.
When the plotter is selected as the output device, it is capable of drawing the graph shown on the screen or of drawing only the data traces(s), so that multiple traces may be drawn on a single sheet of paper (in different colors, if needed).
i. Disk Output
The 360 can write-to or read-from the disk all measured data. This data is stored as an ASCII file in the exact same format as shown in FIG. 63. If read back from the disk, the data is output to the printer. There, it prints as tabular data.
TRANSMISSION AND REFLECTION MEASUREMENTS
This discussion provides information on general measurement considerations and transmission and reflection measurements using the 360.
Setup and Calibration Procedures and
Measurement Options
To get started, apply power to the system. Do this by first turning on the 360SS45 or 69 source power switch then the analyzer power--the order is important. If the analyzer is powered-up before the source, it will not be able to find the source and will probably fail the self test.
After turning on the power, allow the system to warm up for at least 30 minutes before operation.
In normal operation, the system comes on line in the state that it was in when last turned off. If you want to return the system to its default state, you can do so by pressing the DEFAULT PROGRAM key twice.
The default parameters provide a known starting point. For example, they reset the start and stop frequencies to their maximum values, the source power to 0 dBm, and the display resolution to 501 data points.
The Sweep Setup menu should now appear on the display (it also can be displayed using the SETUP MENU key). If you like, you can select a new start frequency, stop frequency, or source power.
The actual power level at Port 1 is about 10 dB less than the source power level due to internal losses in the test set.
If the 360 system has an Active Device Test Set, you can further reduce the power level at Ports 1 and 2 with the built-in attenuators. Using the Reduced Test Signals option in the Sweep Setup menu, you can change the settings of the Ports 1 and 2 source attenuators over a range of from 0 to 70 dB. The Port 2 test attenuator has a range of from 0 to 40 dB (in 10 dB steps). Selecting the BEGIN CAL key starts the calibration process. The Calibration menus step you through the calibration process, as follows:
1. Select the type of calibration desired.
2. Select the frequency range of calibration. You can choose the normal 501 points, CW (one point), or N-discrete frequencies (from 2 to 501 points).
3. Install the calibration kit devices to the test ports as instructed by the menu. Both the capacitance coefficients for the open and the offset lengths for the Open and Short can be modified or defined.
When the calibration is completed, you can store the calibration data in the internal memory or on a disk. You are now ready to install the test device and proceed with the measurement. At this point you have a number of measurement options to consider such as displays, markers, limits, outputs, sweeps, and enhancements.
You can select any of the available graph types and display them for any calibrated parameter on any of the four channels.
Up to six markers are available. Using the Marker Menu, you can set the frequency of each one, you can set each one in the delta marker mode, and you can set each marker's level to maximum or minimum.
In some cases--such as in a production environment --limit lines are desirable. Options within the menu called up using the LIMITS key, provide two limit lines for each channel. These limit lines function with all of the graph types, including Smith and admittance. The color of the limit lines differs from that of the measurement trace. This allows for easy analysis of results.
The Output Menu (App. 42) gives you a choice between a printer and a colored-pen plotter. It also lets you choose the data-output type, output head, and disk output functions.
To output the display, press the START PRINT key. The default setting provides for a full display printout from the associated printer.
To label the output, select Setup Output Headers in the Output Menu or press the DEVICE ID key.
On the output to the printer, plotter, or disk, a menu then appears that lets you specify the device name/serial number, the dater and the operator's name (App. 43).
Sweep frequencies can be changed with the calibration applied as long as the frequencies are between the calibration start and stop frequencies.
Additionally, a marker sweep can be selected from the Setup Menu. This allows you to sweep between any two active markers so long as the frequency of each falls between the calibrated start and stop frequencies.
Using the DATA POINTS key, you can select the number of data points for optimal resolution-vs-speed.
Finally, you can enhance the measurement data by reducing the IF bandwidth and using averaging and/or smoothing (see below).
Change the IF bandwidth by selecting the IF BW key.
Set the averaging and smoothing values by selecting the AVG/SMOOTH MENU key.
Turn on the averaging and smoothing using the TRACE SMOOTH and AVERAGE keys, which have LED's to let you know that the enhancement is being applied.
Transmission and Reflection Measurements
Before going any further, let us take a few moments to review some basic principles of network measurements. First, we apply incident energy to the input of a test device. If the device's input impedance differs from the measurement system's impedance, some of that energy is reflected. The remainder is transmitted through the device. We call the ratio of reflected-to-incident energy the reflection coefficient. The ratio of transmitted-to-incident energy we call the transmission coefficient.
These ratios are complex quantities that have magnitude and phase components. Using vector representation, the vector magnitude is the ratio of reflected-to-incident magnitude (or transmitted-to-incident magnitude), while the vector phase is the difference in phase between the incident energy and the reflected/transmitted energy.
The measurement reference for the incident energy is the point at which the device connects to the measurement system. We call this point the reference plane. The incident energy at the reference plane is defined as having a magnitude of 1 and a phase of 0 degrees. We establish this during the calibration.
The ratio of reflected and transmitted energy to the incident energy can be represented by a number of different measurements and units, as shown below.
The default display for reflection measurements is the Smith chart. The default display for transmission measurements is the Log Magnitude and Phase graph.
The Smith chart is a convenient way to display device impedance and is a useful aid for the graphical design and analysis of microwave circuits.
Let us assume both that our system is already calibrated and that we have equalized the system for the test port in use. We would then
1. Connect the Short. A Short always appears as a dot at the left-most edge of the Smith chart's horizontal axis.
2. Connect a Termination. Now you will see another dot located at the center (1+j0) of the chart (this assumes a 50-ohm load).
3. Connect the Open. An Open appears as an arc on the chart's right edge. This is due to the fringing capacitance of the Open standard.
Now let us perform a reflection measurement on a 20 dB attenuator over the 1-to-18 Ghz range.
We need to determine the setup, calibration, and measurement requirements.
A known good starting point is to reset with DEFAULT PARAMETERS. Since our measurement lies between 1 and 18 GHz, set the Start and Stop frequencies using the Sweep Setup menu that appears on the display following system reset.
Let us perform a simple calibration, REFLECTION ONLY, which uses an open, a shorts and a broadband load. To do this, press the BEGIN CAL key and follow the directions in the menu area.
When you complete the calibration, the "CHANNEL 1 WITH S11" Smith chart appears on the display. Now
1. Select the Log Magnitude display and install the attenuator.
2. Select AUTOSCALE to optimize the display data.
3. Use Markers 1 and 2 to find the maximum and minimum impedance.
Now let us perform transmission measurement on the same 20 dB attenuator over the same frequency range. We will follow the same steps as before, but this time we will use additional features.
Once again, reset the system using the DEFAULT PARAMETERS key.
In this calibration we will select the N-Discrete Frequencies menu option and step all frequencies in increments of 50 MHz.
When the calibration is complete, Channel 1 will display "S12 FORWARD TRANSMISSION WITH LOG MAGNITUDE AND PHASE." You can use Markers 1 and 2 to find the maximum and minimum values of the attenuators insertion loss.
LOW LEVEL AND GAIN MEASUREMENTS
This discussion provides methods and techniques for making gain and low-signal-level measurements. It is divided into 360 system considerations and test device considerations.
360 System Considerations
The 360 system is limited in its ability to test low-signal levels by its dynamic range and low signal-to-noise-power ratio. First we will discuss dynamic range, which is the difference between the maximum and minimum acceptable signal levels (Dynamic Range=P.sub.max -P.sub.min).
a. Dynamic Range
The dynamic range of the 360 is limited by the 0.1 dB compression level of the samplers at high signal levels. It is further limited at low signal levels by leakage signals and noise.
The 0.1 dB compression level is on the order of -10 dBm. The 360 is designed such that all other conversions compress at a much greater level, which leaves the samplers as the main source of non-linearity.
The small signal response is limited by errors due to noise and leakage signals. The leakage signals are both from within the 360 and at the device-under-test (DUT) connectors.
The detected signal is the vector sum of the desired signals, the noise signals, and the leakage signals. These signals introduce an error or uncertainty.
Some of the possible leakage paths for the 360 are the transfer switch, the frequency conversion module, and leakage from the DUT. The system limits these leakages to greater than 100 dB. The 12-term error correction can reduce this leakage to better than 110 dB at 18 Ghz and 90 dB at 40 Ghz.
The DUT connectors should have internally captivated center pins. Those connectors which use external pins to captivate the center conductor should have silver loaded epoxy on the pins to reduce radiation to better than 90 dB.
b. Signal-to-Noise Power Ratio
The signal-to-noise power ratio for each of the test or reference channels is given by the formula
S/N Ratio=Signal Power/Noise Power
Where "signal power" is the power level of the 83.33 Khz IF signal at the internal synchronous detectors, and "noise power" is total power contained within the bandwidth of the bandpass filter at 83.33 Khz.
The uncertainty, or error, in a measurement is a function of the amplitude of leakage signals and of the noise level. The uncertainty in the measurement of magnitude and phase of the S-parameters are calculable.
The most difficult types of measurements 1 are those that exercise the full dynamic range of the 360, such as filters. Filter measurements are examples of where one must observe both low-insertion loss (in the passband) and high attenuation (in the stop band).
There are two techniques that you can use to optimize the signal-to-noise ratio. They are (1) maximizing the RF signal level and (2) using signal enhancement.
To maximize the RF signal level, use the default settings of the signal source. The 360SS45 or 69 defaults to 0 dBm--a power level that both maximizes dynamic range and optimizes linearity.
The 360 provides two enhancements for improving the signal-to-noise ratio: IF bandwidth reduction and averaging.
Reducing the IF bandwidth is a primary method for enhancing accuracy. The 360 has a choice of three bandwidths available from the front panel: Normal (10 Khz), Reduced (1 Khz), and Minimum (100 Hz). The noise level should decrease by a factor equal to the square root of the IF bandwidth. Using IF Bandwidth reduction makes for faster measurements than with the use of an equivalent amount of averaging.
Averaging is another way to improve accuracy. The improvement is proportional to the square root of the number of averages. The improvement from averaging, however, comes at the expense of increased sweep time.
EXAMPLE
Using 1 Khz BW reduction and 10 averages, you would increase the signal-to-noise ratio by 7.6 dB but would lengthen the time required for the measurement by a factor of 4.3. This example assumes a constant signal power.
Test Device (DUT) Considerations
In order to test a device, the required input RF level and the expected device output RF level must be determined.
The RF level at Port 1 must be set for the device input RF power level required. The power level at Port 1 is about 10 dB less than the RF source power level, or about -10 dBm. Attenuation can be added in steps of 10 dB up to 70 dB using the built-in source attenuator in the Models 3620 and 3621 Active Device Test Sets available for WILTRON Co.
The RF level into Port 2 should be kept to -10 dBm or less to ensure optimum linearity and to protect internal components from damage. The never-to-exceed RF level into either Port 1 or Port 2 is +20 dBm. You can add up to 40 dB of attenuation (in 10 dB steps) into Port 2 using the built-in test attenuator in the active device test sets.
If you are using a test set that does not have built-in attenuators, you should use external attenuators on Port 1 and Port 2 as needed. However, the use of external attenuators invalidates input and output match measurements; whereas, the built-in attenuators are compensated by the calibration and do not affect reflection measurements.
Before calibration, ensure that the test setup is correct by setting the power level and adding attenuation as needed.
The 360 uses enhancements in the calibration to ensure a wide dynamic range. It automatically selects the REDUCED IF bandwidth front panel setting and varies the number of averages with the calibration device. Terminations require the most averages.
If desired, the IF bandwidth and number of averages can be specified for the calibration measurements. Using 100 average (AVG=100) appears to be sufficient for most measurements.
To obtain the maximum performance from the 360 for measurements of attenuation, you can use the capability of the N discrete frequency calibration to spot check measurements in the frequency band of interest.
As described above, the measurement procedure is straightforward.
Wide Dynamic Range Device--Filter
Since you do both low-insertion-loss and high-attenuation measurements simultaneously, use the maximum RF signal level and no attenuation. Selecting the REDUCED IF BW setting and 100 averages will likely suffice for this kind of measurements.
High Gain Device--FET
This device has a typical 15 dB gain and requires an input level of about -30 dBm. Set the Port 1 Source Attenuator to 20 dB. Since the device RF output level is -15 dBm (-30 dBm 15 dB[gain]=-15 dBm) no attenuation is needed at Port 2.
Medium Power Device--Amplifier
Measure the small signal parameters of a 10 dB gain device that requires an input power level of -10 dBm. Here, Port 1 will have no attenuation. The device RF output level is -10 dBm. This level equals 0 dBm (-10 dBm+10 dB[gain]=0 dBm) into Port 2 and will cause compression in the measurement. At least 10 dB of test attenuation will be needed at Port 2, which will reduce the Port 2 RF level to -10 dB.
GROUP DELAY MEASUREMENTS
Group delay is the measure of transit time through a device at a particular frequency. Ideally, we want to measure a constant--or relatively constant--transit time over frequency. The top waveform shown in FIG. 66 is measured at one frequency. The bottom waveform is identical to the first, simply delayed in time.
Referring to FIG. 67, the first waveform shown is the original waveform. It is made up of many frequency components. After traveling through a device the signal is delayed in time. Some frequencies are delayed more than others and thus our waveform does not have exactly the same shape as before.
When delay is nonlinear, as shown above, distortion occurs. By measuring group delay with a network analyzer we can characterize the distortion that occurs from a signal traveling through our test device.
When designing components it is important to measure group delay so that you can compensate for any distortion caused by the component.
You may be able to tune the device so as to optimize the performance of group delay over the frequency range of interest. Outside of the specified frequency range, the group delay may or may not be linear.
So how is group delay measured? Signals travel too fast to enable measuring the input and output times of each frequency component. Consequently, we must use mathematical calculations to derive the group delay from the phase slope.
Group delay is mathematically represented by the following equations: ##EQU4##
What this equation shows is that group delay is a measure of the change in phase with relation to the change in frequency.
The change in frequency is referred to as an aperture. In other words, the aperture is equal to the frequency range divided by the number of data points.
To measure group delay the frequency aperture must be selected. Depending on the size of aperture, different levels of precision can result for the measurement of group delay.
A wide aperture results in a loss of fine-grain variations but gives more sensitivity in the measurement of time delay. A small aperture gives better frequency resolution, but at the cost of lost sensitivity. Thus, for any comparison of group delay data you must know the aperture used to make the measurement (FIG. 68).
Let us take a look at a group delay measurement made on the WILTRON 360 Vector Network Analyzer. Group delay, as a measurement option, can be found in the Graph Type menu. After selecting the option, the 360 displays the data in a time-vs-frequency graph, or to be more exact, a group-delay-vs-frequency graph.
The 360 automatically selects the frequency spacing between data points--that is, the aperture. This value is displayed on the screen with the measurement.
The aperture defaults to the smallest setting for the frequency range and number of data points selected. This value is displayed in the SET SCALING menu when measuring group delay.
Group delay applications are found throughout the microwave industry, although the majority of such measurements are made in the telecommunications area.
One occurrence of group delay that you may have experienced is with a long-distance telephone call. Occasionally a phone call can be disturbing because of the delay in time from when you speak and when the other person responds. If there is simply a delay, then time delay--or linear group delay--has occurred. But if the voices are also distorted, then non-linear group delay has occurred. It is this distortion that we must avoid. We can avoid linear group delay by measuring group delay both during the design and development stages and during recalibration in the field.
One final group-delay application is found in the development of components. In this application, group delay is measured for the transit time of a signal through the device. When time is of the essence in a fast switching system, as in a modern computer, the travel time through a device is critical.
ACTIVE DEVICE MEASUREMENTS
Active devices, for example FETs, amplifiers and MMICs, are key components in microwave systems. The microwave future is in smaller integrated microwave packages.
Actually, the measurements that are made are the same measurements made on passive devices.
Active devices come in many shapes and sizes. In most cases we are going to have to develop a fixture in which to mount the device, since it may have tabs, leads or pads instead of connectors.
Active devices require bias voltages, and in many cases they are easily damaged. High gain amplifiers may saturate with input signals of -50 dBm! With active devices, we have a new set of measurement requirements.
WILTRON has developed two models of active device test sets (Models 3620 and 3621) to help you make these types of measurements. These test sets include both step attenuators (70 dB) used to adjust operating power levels, and bias tees used to bias the device via the test port center conductor. This approach to bias is useful for testing transistors; however, MMIC's usually require bias injection at other points (FIG. 69).
Test fixtures are necessary for mounting the device so that it can be measured in a coaxial (or waveguide) measuring system.
Now we have an interesting situation. While we can measure the performance at the connector--which is the calibration plane--what we really want to know is how our device performs (FIG. 70).
You can consider the device embedded in the fixture and can measure the S-parameters of the fixture with the device installed.
The most elementary situation is a system in which the test fixture is electrically ideal or transparent. In this case the solution is simple--merely move the reference plane out to the device (FIG. 71).
In some cases--depending on the fixture or the device being measured--this is satisfactory. But when it is not, we need to employ other techniques.
One of the reasons that moving the reference plane out to the device does not always work, is that the test fixture includes a transition from coax to a structure such as microstrip, coplanar waveguide, or stripline (FIG. 72).
Engineers have come to grips with the general problem. However, there is no established standard approach. Two of the more common approaches are to calibrate the fixture as a part of the analyzer, and to characterize the fixture and compute the desired result.
In the discussion on calibration (above) we saw that the calibration components establish the reference plane and determine the quality of the measurement. If we have a good Open, Short and Z.sub.0 load to place at the end of a microstrip line, we can calibrate the system at the point of measurement.
FIG. 73 shows some of the special test-fixture calibration standards that are available.
These special calibration kits are far from perfect. For instance opens are difficult due to radiation effects, and good terminations are hard to find, 20-30 db being often the best, terminations also determining "effective directivity". Although the special calibration kits are far from perfect, they are superior to our perfect transmission line assumption.
You may have heard of the probe system built to permit on-wafer measurements by Cascade Microtech. It is a good example of a system conducive to this approach.
The Open, Short, termination approach provides three known standards that permit the analyzer to solve for three unknowns (FIG. 74).
CAUTION
You should turn off or disconnect the bias supplies during the calibration, since you are using a Short as the calibration standard.
It is also possible to use three known impedances. For instance, a varactor with three voltages applied (FIG. 75).
The second approach is to model the fixture. Modeling is elegant but of limited use due to the non-ideal characteristics of the fixture. Modeling can be accomplished in a CAD system like Touchstone or Compass.
In summary, there are quite a variety of approaches--all with their own characteristic pitfalls. Engineers try to choose the most appropriate technique for their application.
TIME DOMAIN MEASUREMENTS
Time Domain Measurements, Discussion
The Option 360-2 Time Domain feature for the WILTRON 360 analyzer is a useful measurement tool for determining the location of impedance discontinuities. Some typical applications are identifying and analyzing circuit elements, isolating and analyzing a desired response, locating faults in cables, and measuring antennas.
The relationship between the frequency-domain response and the time-domain response of a network is described mathematically by the Fourier transform. The 360 makes measurements in the frequency domain then calculates the inverse Fourier transform to give the time-domain response. The time-domain response is displayed as a function of time (or distance). This computational technique benefits from the wide dynamic range and the error correction of the frequency-domain data. Let us examine the time-domain capabilities of the Model 360 Vector Network Analyzer. Two measurement modes are available: lowpass and bandpass.
We use the lowpass mode with devices that have a dc or a low-frequency response. In the lowpass mode two responses to the device-undertest (DUT) are available: impulse or step stimulus. The frequencies used for the test must be harmonically related to the start frequency.
The lowpass impulse response displays the location of discontinuities as well as information useful in determining the impedance (R, L, or C) of each discontinuity.
The impulse response is a peak that goes positive for R>Z.sub.0 and negative for R<Z.sub.O. The height of the response is equal to the reflection coefficient (rho=(R-Z.sub.0)/(R +Z.sub.0)). The impulse response for a shunt capacitance is a negative-then-positive peak and for a series inductance is a positive-then-negative peak (FIG. 76).
An example of using impulse response is circuit impedance analysis. With an impulse response, we can observe the circuit response of a passive device, such as a power splitter, and make final adjustments during the test (FIG. 77). The lowpass step response displays the location of discontinuities as well as information useful in determining the impedance (R, L, or C) of each discontinuity. If you are familiar with time-domain reflectometry (TDR) you may feel more comfortable with step response, as the displays are similar.
The lowpass step response for a resistive impedance is a positive level shift for R>Z.sub.0 and a negative level shift for R<Z.sub.0. The height of the response is equal to the reflection coefficient (rho=(R-Z.sub.0)/(R+Z.sub.0)). The step response for a shunt capacitance is a negative peak, and for a series inductance it is a positive peak (FIG. 78).
An example of using the lowpass step response is cable fault location. In the frequency domain a cable with a fault exhibits much worse match than a good cable. Using lowpass step response, both the location of the discontinuity and information about its type are available (FIG. 79).
The 360 bandpass mode gives the response of the DUT to an RF-burst stimulus. Two types of response are available: impulse and phaser-impulse. An advantage of the bandpass mode is that any frequency range can be used. Use this mode with devices that do not have a dc or low-frequency path.
Use the bandpass-impulse response to show the location of a discontinuity in time or distance, as indicated by changes in its magnitude. Unlike the low-pass mode, no information as to the type of the discontinuity is available. A typical use for this mode is to measure devices--such as filters, waveguide, high-pass networks, bandpass networks--where a low-frequency response is not available.
The bandpass-impulse response for various impedance discontinuities is shown in FIG. 80. As we can see, no information about the type of discontinuity is available.
An example of using the bandpass-impulse response, is the pulse height, ringing, and pulse envelope of a bandpass filter.
Use the phaser-impulse response with bandpass response to determine the type of an isolated impedance discontinuity.
After the bandpass-impulse response has been isolated, the phaser-impulse response for a resistive-impedance-level change is a peak that goes positive (R>Z.sub.0) for the real part of S.sub.11 and negative for R<Z.sub.0. The imaginary part remains relatively constant. In each case the peak is proportional to the reflection coefficient. The phaser-impulse response for a shunt capacitance is a negative-going peak in the imaginary part of S.sub.11. For a series inductance, it is a positive going peak (FIG. 81). Next, let us look at a complex circuit comprising a resistor in series with an inductor shunted by a capacitor wherein R<Z.sub.0. These impedance changes are shown in the time domain for the lowpass-impulse response, lowpass-step response, and bandpass-impulse response (FIG. 82).
The 360 processes bandpass-impulse-response data to obtain phasor-impulse response. This becomes most advantageous where both a reactive reflection and an impedance change occur at the same location. The real part of the time-domain response shows the location of impedance level changes, while the imaginary part shows the type of reactive discontinuity. Phasor-impulse response displays one discontinuity at a time (FIG. 83).
Details of the method and apparatus whereby the system 100 of the present invention produces Phasor-impulse response displays is described in the commonly assigned co-pending Patent Application entitled APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR LOW-PASS EQUIVALENT PROCESSING, S.N. 175,762, invented by Robert Huenemenn, filed on the same date as this Application and which is hereby expressly incorporated herein in its entirety.
a. Operating Time Domain
To operate in the time domain mode, press the DOMAIN key. A domain menu (App. 86) allows us to select the frequency- or time-domain modes by simple cursor selection. The 360 defaults to the frequency domain.
Select time or distance for the horizontal axis. The 360 defaults to time axis.
NOTE
If we select distance, be sure to set the dielectric constant in the reference Delay menu (App. 87).
Select SET RANGE and use the START/STOP or GATE/SPAN selections to set the range (App. 88). For the lowpass mode select either IMPULSE or STEP Response and set the DC term. The 360 defaults to the IMPULSE Response and the AUTO EXTRAPOLATE mode for the DC term (App. 89).
NOTE
The bandpass mode displays Bandpass Impulse Response unless we select Phasor Impulse Response.
The Marker Range menu allows us to zoom in and display the range between two selected markers (App. 90).
b. Windowing
Windowing is a frequency filter that we apply to the frequency-domain data when we convert it to time-domain data. This filtering rolls off the abrupt transition at F1 and F2. This effectively produces a time-domain response with lower sidelobes. Windowing allows a limited degree of control over the pulse shape, trading off ringing (sidelobes) for pulse width (FIG. 84).
We select windowing from the Time Domain Setup menu. Four different windows are available: RECTANGLE, NOMINAL, LOW SIDELOBE, and MINIMUM SIDELOBE. The RECTANGLE option provides the narrowest pulse width, while the MINIMUM SIDELOBE option provides the least ringing (fewest sidelobes). The 360 defaults to the NOMINAL option, which is acceptable for most measurements (App. 91).
c. Gating
Gating is a time filter that allows for removing unwanted time-domain responses by gating the desired response. We can view the isolated response in both the time domain--using the PHASOR IMPULSE RESPONSE option --and in the frequency domain--using the FREQUENCY WITH TIME GATE selection (FIG. 85).
There are four different gate shapes available: RECTANGLE, NOMINAL, LOW SIDELOBE, and MINIMUM SIDELOBE. The 360 defaults to the NOMINAL gate. To specify a different shape simply enter the Gate menu and select the desired gating shape. The RECTANGLE has the largest ripple, while MINIMUM SIDELOBE has the least (App. 92).
d. Gating Example
Let us look at a reflection measurement. A device at the end of a coax cable is measured in the frequency domain. We would like to measure the return loss of this device and characterize its impedance, but to do so we have to eliminate the response of the cable and connectors. Steps 1 thru 5 below describe a method for making this measurement.
1. Convert the frequency domain data into the time domain using TIME BANDPASS MODE.
2. Select SET GATE in the Domain menu then GATE DISP in the Gate menu. This allows us to put the gate around the discontinuity of interest using the START, STOP, or CENTER/SPAN selections.
3. Select GATE ON in the Gate menu and the unwanted responses are removed.
4. Select PHASER IMPULSE ON in the Bandpass menu. The real and imaginary responses of the Phaser Impulse Response are displayed. Based on the display, the device has a series inductance as well as resistance >50 ohms.
5. Select FREQUENCY WITH TIME GATE in the Domain menu to display the frequency domain S.sub.11 forward reflection of the gated time domain response.
An example of gating a transmission measurement is making an antenna measurement. Gating can remove unwanted ground or chamber reflections that interfere with characterizing an antenna's pattern (FIG. 86).
Finally, let's look at some measurement considerations and ways to optimize their time-domain results.
Small impedance changes cause small responses that can be lost in the noise floor. This is also true of long cable and waveguide runs with high insertion loss.
To optimize for small responses:
Use averaging and reduced IF bandwidth to lower the noise floor.
Use maximum power to provide maximum dynamic range.
Use the window with the lowest sidelobes to reduce ringing.
Elements that are physically close or have similar length transmission paths can have minimal or overlapping time domain responses.
To optimize for close-response measurements and attain the best resolution:
Use the widest sweep.
Use the window with the narrowest pulse shape.
To maximize the distance measurement capability without causing aliasing (false information), use the minimum-frequency-step size by selecting 501 points and the minimum-required-frequency range.
In summary, the 360 Time Domain capability is a powerful and versatile tool in performing network analyzer measurements.
During Time Domain Measurement, the system 100 of the present invention advantageously reduces the amount of processing necessary to make measurements by using the apparatus and method described in the commonly assigned co-pending Patent Application entitled CROSS-PATH OPTIMIZATION IN MULTI-TASK PROCESSING, invented by Douglas R. Thornton, Ser. No. 176,096, filed on the same date as this Application and which is expressly incorporated herein in its entirety by this reference.
Time Domain Menus
The menus associated with the Time Domain Option are described in Appso 93-104,
GPIB OPERATION--BASIC PROGRAMMING
This section provides a description of the GPIB and the network analyzer command codes. It also provides several examples of bus programming.
DESCRIPTION OF THE IEEE-488
(IEC-625) INTERFACE BUS
The IEEE-488 General Purpose Interface Bus (GPIB) is an instrumentation interface for integrating instruments, calculators, and computers into systems. The bus uses 16 signal lines to effect transfer of data and commands to as many as 15 instruments.
The instruments on the bus are connected in parallel, as shown in FIG. 87. Eight of the signal lines (DIO 1 thru DI08) are used to the transfer of data and other messages in a byte-serial, bit-parallel form. The remaining eight lines are used for communications timing (handshake), control, and status information. Data are transmitted on the eight GPIB data lines as a series of eight-bit characters, referred to as bytes. Data transferral is by means of an interlocked handshake technique.
This technique permits asynchronous communications over a wide range of data rates. The following paragraphs provide an overview of the data, and handshake buses, and describe how these buses interface with the network analyzer.
Data Bus Description
The data bus is the conduit for transmitting information and data between the controller and the network analyzer. It contains eight bi-directional, active-low signal lines. DIO 1 thru DIO 8. One byte of information (eight bits) is transferred over the bus at a time. DI01 represents the least-significant bit (LSB) in this byte and DIO 8 represents the most-significant bit (MSB). Each byte represents a peripheral address (either primary or secondary), a control word, or a data byte.
Management Bus Description
The management bus is a group of five lines used to control the operation of the bus system. Functional information regarding the individual control lines is provided below.
a. ATN (Attention):
When this line is TRUE, the network analyzer responds to appropriate interface messages such as, device clear and serial poll and to its own listen/talk address.
b. EOI (End Or Identify)
When this line is TRUE, the last byte of a multi-byte message has been placed on the line. The line is also used in conjunction with ATN to indicate a parallel poll.
c. (IFC Interface Clear)
When this line is TRUE, the network analyzer's interface functions are placed in a known state such as, unaddressed to talk, unaddressed to listen, and service request idle.
d. REN (Remote Enable)
When this line is TRUE the network analyzer is enabled upon receipt of its listen, address for entry into the remote state. This mode is exited either when the REN line goes FALSE (high) or when the network analyzer receives a go-to-local (GTL) message or an RTL (return to local) command.
e. SRO (Service Request)
This line is pulled LOW (true) by the network analyzer to indicate that certain preprogrammed conditions exist.
Data Byte Transfer Control (Handshake)
Bus Description
Information is transferred on the data lines by a technique called the three-wire handshake. The three handshake-bus signal lines (FIG. 88) are described below.
a. DAV (Data Valid)
This line goes TRUE (arrow 1) when the talker has (1) sensed that NRFD is FALSE, (2) placed a byte of data on the bus, and (3) waited an appropriate length of time for the data to settle.
b. NFRD (NOT READY FOR DATA)
This line goes TRUE (arrow 2) when a listener indicates that valid data has not yet been accepted. The time between the events shown by arrows 1 and 2 is variable and depends upon the speed with which a listener can accept the information.
c. NDAC (NOT DATA ACCEPTED).
This line goes FALSE to indicate that a listener has accepted the current data byte for internal processing. When the data byte has been accepted, the listener releases its hold on NDAC and allows the line to go FALSE. However, since the GPIB is constructed in a wired-OR configuration, NDAC will not go FALSE until all listeners participating in the interchange have also released the line. As shown by arrow 3, when NDAC goes FALSE, DAV follows suit a short time later. The FALSE state of DAV indicates that valid data has been removed; consequently, NDAC goes LOW in preparation for the next data interchange (arrow 4).
Arrow 5 shows the next action in time: NRFD going FALSE after NDAC has returned TRUE. The FALSE state of NRFD indicates that all listeners are ready for the next information interchange. The time between these last two events is variable and depends on how long it takes a listener to process the data byte. In summation, the wired-OR construction forces a talker to wait for the slowest instrument to accept the current data byte before placing a new data byte on the bus.
GPIB OPERATION
All front panel keys, except for LINE ON/OFF, are bus controllable. When used on the GPIB, the network analyzer functions as both listener and a talker. Table 4-1 provides a listing of the GPIB subset functions and gives the capability for each.
TABLE 4-1______________________________________360 IEEE-488 Bus Subset CapabilityGPIB SUBSET FUNCTION DESCRIPTION______________________________________AH1 Acceptor Handshake Complete CapabilitySH1 Source Handshake Complete CapabilityT6 Talker No Talk Only (TON)TE0 Talker with No Capability Address ExtensionL4 Listener No Listen Only (LON)LE0 Listener with No Capability Address ExtensionSR1 Service Request Complete CapabilityRL1 Remote/Local Complete CapabilityPP1 Parallel Poll Complete CapabilityDC1 Device Clear Complete CapabilityDT1 Device Trigger Complete Capability______________________________________
COMMAND CODES, DESCRIPTION
The following paragraphs and tables describe the various GPIB command codes used by the 360.
COMMAND CODES: Classifications
The GPIB interface for the 360 uses more than 300 commands to implement the various functions. For descriptive purposes, the commands are organized into functional classifications.
COMMAND CODES: Syntax And Programming Tips
a. Syntax
All mnemonics are three characters long and may be entered in either upper or lower case. Mnemonics which require data must have a valid terminator mnemonic after the data. Separators between mnemonics and either data or other mnemonics are optional.
b. Programming Tips
The 360 is a "channel-based" instrument, which means that most commands apply only to the current active channel. Therefore, to set up a desired state on multiple channels, a CH1-CH4 mnemonic should precede the setup. For example:
"D14 CH1 S11 SM1 CH2 S12 MPH CH3 S21 MAG CH4 S22 ISM"
This string sets up a quad display (D14) and then sets the s-parameter and graph type desired for each Channel (Channel 1: S.sub.11, Smith chart; Channel 2: S.sub.12, log magnitude and phase; Channel 3: S.sub.21, log magnitude; Channel 4: S.sub.22, inverted Smith chart).
Other command codes are "global" in their extent, meaning they apply to all channels. Examples of these mnemonics: start/stop frequency (SRT,STP), averaging (AVG,AOF), and source power (PWR).
COMMAND CODES: Response To Errors
The following describes how the 360 responds to error conditions.
a. SYNTAX ERROR
The 360 beeps and sends a Service Request (SRQ), if enabled. It also ignores any further commands until it is programmed to talk or be unlistened.
b. PARAMETER OUT OF RANGE ERROR
The 360 moves the cursor to be adjacent to the erroneous entry, beeps, displays the entry in red and sends an SRQ (if enabled). The error is cleared upon execution of the next instruction.
C. ACTION REQUESTED NOT POSSIBLE
The 360 sends an SRQ (if enabled) and ignores the command.
COMMAND CODES: Channel Control
The commands described in Table 4-4 set up the current display mode and active channel on the 360. The active channel specifies the channel to which channel-based changes apply.
TABLE 4-4______________________________________Channel Control Command CodesCommand Code Description______________________________________DSP Single Channel Display of Active ChannelD13 Dual Channel Display, Channels 1 and 3D24 Dual Channel Display, Channels 2 and 4D14 Quad Display, All Four ChannelsCH1 Channel 1 Selected as Active ChannelCH2 Channel 2 Selected as Active ChannelCH3 Channel 3 Selected as Active ChannelCH4 Channel 4 Selected as Active Channel______________________________________
COMMAND CODES: Data Entry
The command codes listed in Table 4-5 are used for mnemonics which must have numeric values. For mnemonics that take numeric values, an appropriate terminator is required, in addition to a numeric value.
TABLE 4-5______________________________________Data Entry Command CodesCommand Code Description______________________________________0,1,2,3,4,5, Numerals for Numeric Entry6,7,8,9- Minus Sign. Decimal PointGHZ Gigahertz Data TerminatorMHZ Megahertz Data TerminatorKHZ Kilohertz Data TerminatorPSC Picoseconds Data TerminatorNSC Nanoseconds Data TerminatorUSC Microseconds Data TerminatorDBL dB Log Data TerminatorDBM dBm Data TerminatorDEG Degrees Data TerminatorMMT Millimeter Data TerminatorCMT Centimeter Data TerminatorMTR Meter Data TerminatorXX1 Unitless Data Terminator, .times.1XX3 Unitless Data Terminator, .times.10.sup.-3XM3 Unitless Data Terminator, .times.10.sup.-3REU Real Units Data TerminatorIMU Imaginary Units Data Terminator______________________________________
Command Codes: Measurement Control
The command codes listed in Table 4-6 control the parameter being measured on the active channel (S.sub.11, S.sub.21, S.sub.22 & S.sub.12) and the basic measurement setup. All command codes except S.sub.11, S.sub.21, S.sub.22, and S.sub.12 are global, that is, they apply to the entire instrument. The SA1, SA2, and TA2 command codes can only be used with the Models 3630 and 3621 Test Sets with attenuators. Note that the two source attenuators have ranges of 0 to 70 dB while the test attenuator has a range of 0 to 40 dB. The HLD code holds the sweep at the current point and the CTN code continues sweeping from the current point. The TRS command code either restarts the sweep (continuous sweep mode) or triggers a single sweep (in hold mode). The WFS code causes the 360 to wait a full sweep so that any data on the display is valid. This is useful for scaling the display. It is required when outputting data from the 360, so as to ensure that the data being output is valid. The SWP code puts the 360 into continuous swept mode.
TABLE 4-6__________________________________________________________________________Measurement Control Command CodesCOMMANDCODE DESCRIPTION VALUES TERMINATORS__________________________________________________________________________S11 Selects S11 as S-Parameter On Active Channel N/A N/AS21 Selects S21 as S-Parameter On Active Channel N/A N/AS22 Selects S22 as S-Parameter On Active Channel N/A N/ASRT Sets Start Frequency Depends on GHZ, MHZ, KHZ Frequency Range of InstrumentSTP Sets Stop Frequency Depends on GHZ, MHZ, KHZ Frequency Range of InstrumentCWF Sets CW Frequency Depends on GHZ, MHZ, KHZ Frequency Range of InstrumentPWR Sets Source Power Depends on DBM, XX1, XX3, Power Range of XM3 SourceFHI Sets Data Points to Maximum N/A N/AFME Sets Data Points to Normal N/A N/AFL0 Sets Data Points to Minimum N/A N/ASA1 Sets Source Attenuator for Port 1 0 dB to 70 dB DBL, DBM, XX1, XX3, XM3SA2 Sets Source Attenuator for Port 2 0 dB to 70 dB DBL, DBM, XX1, XX3, XM3TA2 Sets Test Attenuator For Port 2 0 dB to 40 dB DBL, DBM, XX1, XX3, XM3HLD Holds Sweep At Current Point N/A N/ACTN Continue Sweep After Hold N/A N/ATRS Triggers or Restarts a Sweep N/A N/AWFS Wait full sweep N/A N/ASWP Selects Continuous Sweep Mode N/A N/A__________________________________________________________________________
Command Codes: Display
The command codes listed in Table 4-7 are for setting up the graph type on the active channel. Most of the commands are straightforward with the exception of the SME, ISE, SMC and ISC codes. Both SME and ISE require values and only allow values of 10, 20 and 30.
TABLE 4-7__________________________________________________________________________Display Control Command CodesCOMMAND DESCRIPTION VALUES TERMINATORS__________________________________________________________________________MAG Selects Log Magnitude and Phase Display for Active N/A N/A ChannelPHA Selects Phase Display for Active Channel N/A N/AMPH Selects Log Magnitude and Phase Display for Active N/A N/A ChannelSMI Selects Normal Smith Chart Display for Active Channel N/A N/ASWR Selects SWR Display for Active Channel N/A N/AISM Selects Inverted Normal Smith Chart Display for Active N/A N/A ChannelDLA Selects Group Delay Display for Active Channel N/A N/APLR Selects Log Polar Display for Active Display N/A N/ALIN Selects Linear Magnitude Display for Active Channel N/A N/ALPH Selects Linear Magnitude Display for Active Channel N/A N/AREL Selects Real Display for Active Channel N/A N/AIMG Selects Imaginary Display for Active Channel N/A N/ARIM Selects Real and Imaginary Display for Active Channel N/A N/ASME Selects Expanded Smith Chart Display for Active Channel 10, 20, 30 DBL, XX1ISE Selects Inverted Expanded Smith Chart Display for 10, 20, 30 DBL, XX1 ChannelSMC Selects Compressed Smith Chart Display for Active 3 DBL, XX1 ChannelISC Selects Inverted Compressed Smith Chart Display Active 3 DBL, XX1 ChannelSCL Sets Scaling of Display On Active Channel Depends on Graph Depends on Graph Type: Type: Log Mag and Log Polar: 0.001 to 50 DBL XX1, XX3, db/div XM3 Phase: 0.01 to 90 DEG(,XX1, XX3, degrees/div XM3 for PHA display) Group Delay: 1 femtosecond/div PSC, NSC, USC to 999.999 s/div Linear Mag & Linear Polar: 1 nanounit/div to XX1, XX3, SM3 999.999 units/div Imag: 1 nanounit/div to IMU (,XX1, XX3, 999.999 units/div XM3 for IMG display) Smith/Inverted Smith N/A N/AOFF Set Offset of Display on Active Channel Depends on Graph Depends on Graph Type: Type: (This code moves the graph's reference position to the offset value) Log Mag & Log Polar: -999.999 to DBL, XX1, XX3, XM 999.999 dB 3 PHASE: -180 to 180 DEG(,XX1, XX3, degrees XM3 for PHA display) Group Delay: -999.999 to PSC, NSC, USC 999.999 s Linear Mag & Linear Polar: 0 to 999.999 XX1, XX3, line 20, units XM3 Imaginary -999.999 to IMU(,XX1, XX3, 99999.999 units XM3 for IMG display Smith/Inverted Smith: N/A N/AREF Set Reference Line of Display on Active Channel Depends on Graph Depends on Graph Type: Type: Log Magnitude, MAG Display: 0 to 8 DBL, XX1, XX3, XM3 Log Magnitude, MPH Display: 0 to 4 DBL, XX1, XX3, XM3 Phase, PHA Display: 0 to 8 DEG, XX1, XX3, XM3 Phase, MPH Display: 0 to 4 DEG Group Delay: 0 to 8 PSC, NSC, USC, XX1, XX3, XM3 Linear Magnitude, LIN Display: 0 to 8 XX1, XX3, please XM3 Linear Magnitude, LPH Display 0 to 4 XX1, XX3, XM3 Real, REL Display 0 to 8 REU, XX1, XX3, XM3 Real, RIM Display 0 to 4 REU, XX1, XX3, XM3 Imaginary, IMG Display: 0 to 8 IMU, XX1, XX3, XM3 Imaginary, RIM Display: 0 to 4 IMU Smith/Inverted Smith: N/A N/A Linear Polar/Log Polar: N/A N/AASC Autoscale Display On Active Channel N/A N/AAPR Set Group Delay Aperture Percentage 0 to 20 XX1, XX3, XM3__________________________________________________________________________
EXAMPLE
"SME 20 DBL" This code selects a 20 dB expanded Smith chart on the active Channel.
Command Codes SMC and ISC also require values and only allow the value 3.
EXAMPLE
"SMC 3 DBL" This code selects a 3 dB compressed Smith chart on the active channel.
In addition to the brief description in Table 4-7, codes SCL and REF require additional description as provided in sub-paragraphs a and b, below.
a. SCL COMMAND CODE:
The SCL code sets the scaling per division of the graph on the active channel. Notice that for graph types with two types of information, the unitless terminators always apply to the first type of information.
EXAMPLE
"MPH SCL 10 XXi" This code will select a log magnitude and phase display on the active channel and set the magnitude scaling to 10 dB/div. The only way to scale the degrees part of the graph is by explicit use of the DEG terminator:
EXAMPLE
"MPH SCL 45 DEG" This code selects a log magnitude and phase display on the active channel and sets the phase scaling to 45 degrees/div.
NOTE: Smith charts and inverted Smith charts cannot be scaled using the SCL instruction. The different charts are selected using the SME, ISE, SMC and ISC mnemonics.
b. REF Command Code
The REF mnemonic selects which graticule line will be considered the "reference". Notice that for graphs with one type of information such as MAG or PHA--the allowable reference line values are 0 to 8, while for graphs with two types of information the reference line value can only be 0 to 4. As described for the SCL code, for graphs having two types of information present, the unitless terminators apply to the first type of information. There is no reference line defined for Smith charts, inverted Smith charts, linear polar, or log polar displays.
Command Codes: Enhancement
The command codes listed in Table 4-8 control the data enhancement functions of IF bandwidth, averaging, and smoothing. Note that the maximum averaging number is 4095 and that the maximum smoothing number is 20%.
TABLE 4-8______________________________________Enhancement Command CodesCOMMANDCODE DESCRIPTION VALUE TERMINATORS______________________________________IFN Selects Normal IF N/A N/A BandwidthIFR Selects Reduced IF N/A N/A BandwidthIFM Selects Minimum IF N/A N/A BandwidthAVG Turns On 1 to 4095 XX1, XX3, XM3 Averaging and Sets to ValueAOF Turns Off N/A N/A AveragingSON Turns On 0 to 20 XX1, XX3, XM3 Smoothing and Sets to ValueSOF Turns Off N/A N/A Smoothing______________________________________
Command Codes: Reference Delay
The command codes listed in Table 4-9 are used to set up the reference delay applied to a channel and the relative dielectric constant of the system. Note that RDD, RDT and RDA change the active channel's reference delay while DIA, DIT, DIP, DIM, and DIE change the system's dielectric constant--a global change. The code RDA should only be used if a valid sweep is present.
TABLE 4-9__________________________________________________________________________Reference Delay Command CodesCOMMANDCODE DESCRIPTION VALUES TERMINATORS__________________________________________________________________________RDD Sets Reference Delay As a Distance Value for the -999.999 to MMT, CMT, Channel 999.999 MTRRDT Sets Reference Delay As a Time Value for the Active -999.999 to PSC, NSC, USC Channel 999.999,sRDA Selects Automatic Reference Delay for the Active N/A N/A ChannelDIA Selects Air Dielectric (1.00) N/A N/ADIT Selects Teflon Dielectric (2.10) N/A N/ADIP Selects Polyethylene Dielectric (2.26) N/A N/ADIM Selects Microporous Teflon Dielectric (1.69) N/A N/ADIE Sets Dielectric to Value 1 to 999.999999 XX1, XX3, XM3__________________________________________________________________________
Command Codes: Trace Memory
The command codes listed in Table 4-10 control the trace memory function on the active channel and the trace math to be applied to it. These codes also do provide for storing and retrieving the active channel's trace memory to and from the disk.
TABLE 4-10______________________________________Trace Memory Command CodesCOMMANDCODE DESCRIPTION______________________________________DAT Displays Data Trace on Active ChannelMEM Displays Memory Trace on Active ChannelDTM Displays Data and Memory Traces on Active ChannelDNM Displays Measured Data Normalized to Memory on Active ChannelMIN Selects Complex Subtraction As Trace Math on Active ChannelDIV Selects Complex Division As Trace Math on Active ChannelADD Selects Complex Addition As Trace Math on Active ChannelMUL Selects Complex Multiplication As Trace Math on Active ChannelSTD Stores Active Channel's Data Trace to MemorySDK Stores Active Channel's Trace Memory to Disk Under The Specified File NameRCK Retrieves Active Channel's Trace Memory From Disk File Specified______________________________________
In order to view a display that involves trace memory (MEM, DTM and DNM) or to store trace memory to disk, the data for the channel must have been stored to memory first using the STD code.
EXAMPLE
"WFS STD DIV DNM"
This code causes the 360 to:
Wait a full sweep until data is valid (WFS).
Store that to memory (STD).
Select complex division as the trace math (DVI).
Display the data normalized to memory using this trace math(DNM).
Command Codes: Markers
The command codes listed in Table 4-11 control the location and display of the markers and the functions related to the markers. The MK1-MK6 codes are used to set a marker to a desired frequency, time or distance. The terminator mnemonics used must match the active channel's domain (frequency, time, or distance) Otherwise, an action-not-possible error will result.
TABLE 4-11__________________________________________________________________________Marker Command CodesCOMMANDCODETERMINATORS DESCRIPTION VALUES__________________________________________________________________________MK1- Turns On Marker 1-6 and Sets Them to Value AsMK6 Shown Below: Frequency Markers Limited to Current GHZ, MHZ, KHZ Sweep Range Time Markers: Limited to Current PSC, NSC, USC Zoom Range Distance Markers: Limited to Current MMT, CMT, MTR Zoom RangeMOF Disables Markers N/A N/AMON Enables Markers N/A N/AM01- Tums Off Marker 1-6 N/A N/AM06DR1- Turns on Marker 1-6 As Delta Reference Marker N/A N/ADR6DRF Turns On Delta Reference Marker Mode N/A N/ADR0 Turns Off Delta Reference Marker Mode N/A N/AMR1- Selects Marker 1-6 As Readout Marker N/A N/AMR6MMX Moves Active Marker to Maximum Trace Value N/A N/AM1S- Marker Sweep With Marker 1-6 As Start Frequency N/A N/AM6SM1E- Marker Sweep With Marker 1-6 As Stop Frequency N/A N/AM6EM1C- CW Marker Sweep With Marker 1-6 As CW Frequency N/A N/AM6C__________________________________________________________________________
EXAMPLE "MK1 1.0000 NSC" on a frequency domain channel generates an action-not-possible error
Markers can be individually turned off using the MO1-MO6 codes or markers can be disabled using the MOF code. A marker is turned on whenever any of the following conditions occur:
When the marker is set to a value, for example: "MK2 4.5632 Ghz.
When the marker is selected for readout, for example: "MR2".
When the marker is selected as the delta reference marker, for example: "DR2".
The MMN and MMX codes move the active marker to the minimum and maximum trace values on the active channel, respectively. There must be an active marker selected for these mnemonics to execute. The M1-M6S, M1E-M6E and M1C-M6C mnemonics are used to define a marker sweep using the specified marker for either the start, stop, or CW frequency.
EXAMPLE "WFS MR1 MMX M1S"
This code sequence causes the 360 to
Wait for a full sweep of data to be present (WFS).
Turn on marker 1 and select it for readout (MR1).
Move marker 1 to the maximum value of the trace on the active channel (MMX).
Set the start frequency equal to the marker frequency (MlS).
Command Codes: Limits
The command codes listed in Table 4-12 are used to (1) set up the upper and lower limit values on the active channel and (2) set the limit delta for the limit frequency readout function.
TABLE 4-12__________________________________________________________________________Limits Command CodesCOMMANDCODE DESCRIPTION VALUES TERMINATORS__________________________________________________________________________LUP Turns On Limit 1 On the Active Channel and sets it Depends on Graph Depends on Graph value, as Shown Below Type: Type:LLO Turn On Limit 2 On the Active channel And set it Depends on Graph Depends on Graph Value, as Shown Below Type: Type:LFD Set Limit Delta On Active Channel for Limit Frequency Depends On Depends On Graph Readout, as Shown Below Graph Type: Type: Log Mag & Log Polar: -999.999 to DBL, XX1, XX3, 999.999 dB XM3 Phase: -180 to 180 DEG(,XX1, XX3, degrees XM3 for PHA display) Group Delay: -999.999 to PSC, NSC, USC 999.999 s Linear Mag & Linear Polar: 0 to 999.999 U XX1, XX3, XM3 Real: -999.999 to REU, XX1, XX3, 999.999 U XM3 Imaginary: -999.999 to IMU(,XX1, XX3, 999.999 U XM3 for IMG display) Smith/Inverted Smith: 0 to 1.413 units XX1, XX3, XM3LOF Disables Limits On Active Channel N/A N/ALON Enables Limits On Active Channel N/A N/ALFR Selects Limit Frequency Readout for Active N/A N/A ChannelLFP Selects Phase Limit Frequency Readout for Active N/A N/A Channel for Log Magnitude/linear Magnitude and Phase Displays__________________________________________________________________________
The range of values and allowable terminator mnemonics are dependent on the graph type of the active channel much like the SCL, and REF codes described above. As described for these codes, for graphs with two types of information present, the unitless terminators apply to the first type of information. The second type of limit line value is accessed by explicit use of the appropriate data terminator mnemonic.
EXAMPLES
1. "LUP 20 XXi" on a log magnitude and phase display: sets the upper limit on the magnitude display to 20 dB.
2. "LUP 45 DEG" must be used to set the upper limit on the phase graph.
NOTE
The LFR, LFP, and LFD mnemonic codes, which deal with limit frequency readouts, are only available on the following graph types: log magnitude (M/G), log magnitude and phase (MPH), phase (PHA), linear magnitude (LIN), linear magnitude and phase (LPH), standing wave ratio (SWR), and group delay (DLA). The active channel must be a frequency domain channel. The LFP code can be used to select phase limit frequency readouts on log magnitude and phase and linear magnitude and phase graph types. If the LFR code is used on either of these graph types, the magnitude limit frequency readout menu for the channel is displayed.
Command Codes: Hard Copy
The command codes concerned with hard copy are listed in Table 4-13.
TABLE 4.13__________________________________________________________________________Hard Copy Command CodesCOMMANDCODE DESCRIPTION VALUES TERMINATORS__________________________________________________________________________PFS Prints Full Screen N/A N/APGR Prints Graph Area Only N/A N/APMK Prints Tabular Marker Data N/A N/APTB Prints Tabular Trace Data N/A N/APMT Prints Tabular Marker and Trace Data N/A N/APT0-PT9 Selects Tabular Printout Point Density N/A N/APST Stops Print/Plot N/A N/AFFD Printer Form Feed N/A N/APLS Plots Entire Screen N/A N/APLD Plots Graph Area N/A N/APLT Plots Data Trace(s) N/A N/APMN Plots Men N/A N/APLM Plots Markers and Limits N/A N/APLH Plots Header N/A N/APGT Plots Graticule N/APFL Selects Full Size Plot N/A N/APTL Selects 1/4 Size Plot, Top Left N/A N/APTR Selects 1/4 Size Plot, Top Right N/A N/APBL Selects 1/4 Size Plot, Bottom Left N/A N/APBR Selects 1/4 Size Plot, Bottom Right N/A N/ADPN Sets Pen Number for Plotting Data 1 to 8 XX1GPN Sets Pen Number for Plotting Graticule 1 to 8 XX1MPN Sets Pen Number for Plotting Markers and Limits 1 to 8 XX1HPN Sets Pen Number for Plotting Header 1 to 8 XX1LMS Labels Model and Serial Number of Device String of N/A Characters Up To 12 Characters LongLDT Labels Date of Test String of N/A Characters Up to 12 Characters LongLID Labels Device ID String of N/A Characters Up to 12 Characters LongLNM Labels Operator's Name String of N/A Characters Up to 12 Characters LongTDD Stores Tabular Data to Disk in File Specified (See N/Ae N/A Naming Conventions in Paragraph 5-5.5)RTB Recalls Tabular Data From Disk File Specified to N/Anter N/ASPD Sets Plotter Pen Speed Percentage 10 to 100 XX1, XX3, XM3__________________________________________________________________________
These commands are straightforward with the exception of PT0-PT9. These ten codes set up (1) the density of tabular data points output to the printer for PTB and PMT and (2) the number of data points included in the output file for TDD (tabular data to disk). The number in the PT0-PT9 mnemonic codes specifies the number of points that are skipped during the print. Therefore, PT0 selects the densest printing mode while PT9 gives the fewest number of data points.
The command codes for plotting fall into two categories: setup and action. The setup codes are those that specify the desired size and location of the plot (PFL, PTL, PTR, PBL, PBR) and the pen numbers for each element of the plot (DPN, GPN, MPN, HPN). The action mnemonics actually initiate a plot for the subset of the display desired (PLS, PLD, PLT, PMN, PLM, PLH, PGT).
The LMS, LID, LDT and LNM codes require a string of characters to be sent over the GPIB along with the mnemonic. A string input to the 360 must have the quote characters ("") surrounding the desired character for the string and cannot exceed the maximum number of characters specified for the mnemonics. An example of embedding quote characters in a string sent to the 360 is shown in App. 126. This example is in HP 85 BASIC.
The TDD code allows for outputting tubular data under the current print density mode (PT0-PT9) to an ASCII file. The RTB code causes the 360 to read an ASCII file assumed to be print data and output it to the printer.
NOTE
The maximum file size that can be handled with the RTB code is 58,000 bytes. Some miscellaneous commands are given in Table 4-14 as follows:
TABLE 4-14__________________________________________________________________________Miscellaneous Command Codes__________________________________________________________________________RST Resets 360 to its Default Similar to pressing the "DEFAULT PROGRAM" key. StateFOF Implements Frequency Instructs the 360 to blank any frequency information Blanking from the screen and any hard copy output. This code is useful for security reasons.FON Disables Frequency Blanking Frequency blanking can be turned off using this code.BCO Implements Display Blanking Allows for the ultimate in security -- a totally blank screen. In this mode, the 360 is fully operational over the GPIB but nothing appears on the display.BC1 Disables Display Blanking Screen blanking is turned off using the BC1 mnemonic.BLU Selects Blue As 3rd Color Allows selection of the third color used by the 360 for Plane Color markers, limits, and some menu annotation.CYN Selects Cyan As 3rd Color Allows selection of the third color used by the 360 for Plane Color markers, limits, and some menu annotations.TEST Runs A Self Test Instructs the 360 to perform a self test. An error in the self test would be reported in the primary status byte, bit 7 (see paragraph 5-5.7).RTL Returns to Local Control Performs the same function as the control panel. RETURN TO LOCAL key. This code has no effect if the 360 is in local lockout.DFP Displays Global Operating Displays Global Operating Parameters in the data Parameters area or the screen.DGS Displays GPIB System Displays GPIB System Parameters in the data area of Parameters the screen.DCP Displays Calibration Displays Calibration Pararmters in the data area of Parameters the screen.DC1 Displays Channel 1 and 2 Displays Channels 1 and 2 Operating Parameters in the data Operating Parameters area of the screen.DC3 Displays Channel 3 and 4 Displays Channels 1 and 2 Operating Parameters in the data Operating Parameters of the screen.__________________________________________________________________________
Some more advanced command codes are described in Tables 5-1 through 5-4 as follows:
TABLE 5.1__________________________________________________________________________Calibration Command Codes__________________________________________________________________________RPC Repeat Previous Calibration N/A N/ALTC Specify Coaxial Lim N/A N/ALTU Specify Microstrip Line Type N/A N/ALTW Specify Wavestrip Line Type N/A N/ASCM Specify Standard Calibration Method N/A N/AOCM Specify Offset Short Calibration Method N/A N/ALCM Specify LRL Calibration Method N/A N/AC12 Begin 12-term Calibration N/A N/AC8T Begin 8-term (I Port) Calibration N/A N/ACRF Begin Reflection Only (1 Port) Calibration N/A N/ACFR Begin Frequency Response Calibration N/A N/ACFT Begin Reflection Only Frequency Response Calibration N/A N/ACRL Begin Reflection Only Frequency Response Calibration N/A N/ANOC Specify Normal 501-point Calibration N/A N/ADFC Specify Discrate Frequency Calibration N/A N/ACWC Specify CW Calibration N/A N/ATDC Specify Time Domain Harmonic Calibration N/A N/ASRT Enter Start Frequency for Normal or Harmonic Depends on Frequency GHZ, MHZ, KHZ Calibration Range of InstrumentSTP Enter Stop Frequency for Normal or Harmonic Depends on Frequemy GHZ, MHZ, KHZ Calibration Range of InstrumentDFQ Enter Discrate Frequency for Calibration Depends an Frequency GHZ, MHZ, KHZ Range of InstrumentCWF Enter CE Frequency for Calibration Depends on Frequency GHZ, MHZ, KHZ- Range of Instrument__________________________________________________________________________
App. 134 shows a sample program for controlling the calibration data collection, and FIG. 89 shows the binary data transfer message format.
Table 5--5 shows the output values versus various graph types, and App. 138 shows the response string from the OID comment as follows.
TABLE 5.5______________________________________Output Values Versus Various Graph TypesDisplay Type Output Values______________________________________Log Magnitude dB, DegreesPhase dB. DegreesLog Mag & Phase dB, DegreesLinear Magnitude Lin Mag (Rho or Tau), DegreesLinear Mag & Phase Lin Mag (Rho or Tau), DegreesSmith Chart Ohms, Ohms (r + jx)Inverted Smith Siements, Siemens (G + o)Group Delay Seconds, DegreesLog Polar dB, DegreesLinear Polar Lin.Mag (Rho or Tau), DegreesReal Real, imagImaginary Real, imagReal & Imaginary Real, imagSWR SWR, Degrees______________________________________
Table 5-6 shows the calibration coefficient order for various calibration types, and tables 5-7 and 5-8 describe additional command codes.
TABLE 5-6______________________________________Calibration Coefficient Ordering Calbration Type Trans- mssn ReflCo- Refl Freq Freq Freqefficient 12-term 8-term Only Resp Resp Resp# C12 C8T CRF CFR CFT CRL None______________________________________1 EDF EDF EDF ERF ETF ERF --2 ESF ESF ESF ETF -- -- --3 ERF ERF ERF -- -- -- --4 EXF ETF -- -- -- -- --5 ELF -- -- -- -- -- --6 ETF -- -- -- -- -- --7 EDR -- -- -- -- -- --8 ESR -- -- -- -- -- --9 ERR -- -- -- -- -- --A EXR -- -- -- -- -- --B ELR -- -- -- -- -- --C ETR -- -- -- -- -- --______________________________________
TABLE 5-7______________________________________Group Execute Trigger Command CodesCommandCode Description Values______________________________________DEF Begin Definition of Group Execute Trigger N/A ResponseEND End Definition of Group Execute Trigger N/A Response______________________________________
TABLE 5-8__________________________________________________________________________Disk Functions Command CodesCommandCode Description Values__________________________________________________________________________SDK Store Active Channel's Trace String up to 8 Characters Long for File Name Memory to Disk FileRCK Recall Active Channel's Trace String up to 8 Characters Long for File Name Memory From Disk FileSTO Store Calibration Data and String up to 8 Characters Long for File Name Front Panel Setup Information to Disk FileRLD Recall Calibration Data and String up to 8 Characters Long for File Name Front Panel Setup Information From Disk FileTDD Store Tabular Printout Data to String up to 8 Characters Long for File Name ASCII Disk FileRTB Recall Tabular Data File From String up to 8 Characters Long for File Name Disk for Output to PrinterDEC Delete Calibration and Front String up to 8 Characters Long for File Name Panel Setup File From DiskDED Delete Tabular Printout Data String up to 8 Characters Long for File Name File From DiskDEN Delete Trace Memory File From String up to 8 Characters Long for File Name DiskINT Initialize (Format) Disk in Drive N/A as a Data-Only DiskLKT Load Calibration Kit Information N/A From Disk__________________________________________________________________________
App. 141 is an example program illustrating the use of disk function command codes. Apps. 142 and 143 illustrate the two status bytes which describe the status of the 360, Table 5-9 describes the status byte command codes.
TABLE 5-9.______________________________________Status Byte Command CodesCommandCode Description Values______________________________________OPB Output Primary Status Byte One Binary ByteOEB Output Extended (Secondary) One Binary Byte Status ByteIPM Input Primary Status Mask One Binary ByteIEM Input Extended (Secondary) One Binary Byte Status MaskSQ0 Disable Service Requests N/ASQ1 Enable any Unmasked Service N/A RequestsCSB Clear Primary and Secondary N/A Status Bytes______________________________________
App. 145 shows a sample program for status byte enable mask setup and service request handling. Table 5-10 describes the Time Domain command codes.
TABLE 5-10__________________________________________________________________________Time Domain Command CodesCommandCode Description Values Terminators__________________________________________________________________________FQD Select Frequency Domain for Active Channel N/A N/ATBP Select Bandpass Mode With Time Readouts N/A N/A for active ChannelDBP Select Bandpass Mode With Distance N/A N/A Readouts for Active ChannelTPI Select Phasor Impulse Mado With Time N/A N/A Readouts for Active ChannelDPI Select Phasor Impulse Mode With Distance N/A N/A Readouts for Active ChannelTLP Select Lowpass Mode With Time Readouts N/A N/A for Active ChannelDLP Select Lowpass Mode With Distance Readouts N/A N/A fot Active ChannelFGT Select Frequency With Time Gate Made N/A N/ALPI Select Lowpass lmpulse Response for Active N/A N/A ChannelLPS Select Lowpass Stop Response for Active N/A N/A ChannelGON Turn Gate On on Active Channel N/A N/AGON Turn Gate Off on Active Channel N/A N/AGDS Display Gate Symbols on Active Channel With N/A N/A Gate OffZST Sat Start of Time Domain Zoom Range for All N/A N/A Channels in Time Domain Time Mode: .999.999 to 999.999 us PSC, NSC, USC Distance Mode: .999.999 to 999.999 m MMT, CMT, MTRZSP Set Stop of Time Domain Zoom Range for All Channels in Time Domain Time Mode: .999.999 to 999.999 us PSC, NSC, USC Distance Mode: .999.999 to 999.999 m MMT, CMT, MTRZCT Set Center of Time domain Zoom Range for All Channels in Time Domain Time Mode: .999.999 to 999.999 us PSC, NSC, USC Distance Mode .999.999 to 999.999 m MMT, CMT, MTRZSN Sat Span of Time Domain Zoom Rangs for All Channels in Time Domain Time Mode: 0 to 999.999 us PSC, NSC, USC Distance Mode 0 to 999.999 m MMT, CMT, MTRGST Set Gate Start Value for All Channels in Time Domain Time Mode: -999.999 to 999.999 us PSC, NSC, USC Distance Made: -999.999 to 999.999 m MMT, CMT, MTRGSP Set Gate Stop Value for all Channels in Time Domain Time Mode: -999.999 to 999.999 us PSC, NSC, USC Distance Mode: -999.999 to 999.999 m MMT, CMT, MTRGCT Set Gate Center Value for All Channels in Time Domain Time Mode: 0.0000 to 999.999 us PSC, NSC, USC Distance Mads: 0.0000 to 999.999 m MMT, CMT, MTRGSN Sat Gate Span Value for all Channels in Time Domain Time Mode: 0.0000 to 999.999 us PSC, NSC, USC Distance Mode 0.0000 to 999.999 m MMT, CMT, MTRGRT Select Rectangular Gate Shape for all Time N/A N/A Domain ChannelsGNM Select Nominal Gate Shape for all Time N/A N/A Domain ChannelsGLS Select Low Sidelobe Gate Shape for all Time N/A N/A Domain ChannelsGMS Select Minimum Sidelobe Gate Shape for all N/A N/A Time Domain ChannelsWRT Select Rectangular Window Shape for all N/A N/A Time Domain ChannelsWNM Select Nominal Window Shape for all Time n/a n/a Domain ChannelsWLS Select Low Sidelobe Windows Shape for all N/A N/A Time Domain ChannelsWMS Select Minimum Sidelobe Window Shape for N/A N/A all Time Domain ChannelsMRR Restore Original Range After a Marker Zoom N/A N/A OperationDCA Select Auto d.c. term for Low Pass N/A N/ADCZ Select Line impedance d.c. term for Low pass N/A N/ADCO Select Open d.c. Term for Low Pass N/A N/ADCS Select Short d.c. Term for Low Pass N/A N/ADCV* Sect Low Pass d.c. Term to Value -100M.OMEGA. to 1000 M.OMEGA. XX1, XX3, XM#__________________________________________________________________________
An extensive source code listing has been attached hereto as an Appendix and shall be construed as being incorporated herein in its entirety at the end of the description and prior to the claims.
The MODEL 360 VECTOR NETWORK ANALYZER OPERATION MANUAL, copyright 1987, printed December 1987, available from WILTRON Company, the assignor herein, is hereby incorporated herein in its entirety by this reference.
Thus, the scope of the invention is not intended to be limited except by the appended claims in which:
Appendix
-including-
MENU DISPLAYS FOR FUNCTIONS
AVAILABLE ON
THE MEASUREMENT SYSTEM
AND
ERROR CODES
PROVIDED FROM
THE MEASUREMENT SYSTEM
AND
COMMAND CODES
ACCEPTABLE TO
THE MEASUREMENT SYSTEM
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SELECTCALIBRATIONDATA POINTSNORMAL Selects the standard calibration from a(501 POINTS start to a stop frequency that provides forMAXIMUM) up to 501 equally spaced (except the last) points of data for the defined frequency range. A flowchart of the calibration sequence is shown in FIG. 3-40.C.W. Selects the single frequency (C.W.)(1 POINT) calibration sequence that provides for 1 data point at a selected frequency.N-DISCRETE Selects the discrete frequency calibrationFREQUENCIES mode that lets you input a list of up to 501(2 TO 501 individual data point frequencies.POINTS)TIME DOMAIN Selects the calibration mode for low-pass(HARMONIC) time-domain processing.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your selection.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU______________________________________FREQ RANGE OFCALIBRATIONSTART Enter the sweep-start frequency forXX.XXXX GHz calibration. If you desire, you can change this frequency for your meaurement when you reach Menu SU1, which follows the final calibration menu. The only restriction is that your start measurement frequency be greater than or equal to your start calibration frequency.STOP Enter the sweep-stop frequency forXX.XXXX GHz calibration. Like the start frequency, this too can be changed for your measurement. The stop frequency must be lower than or equal to your stop calibration frequency. In other words, your measurement frequency span must be equal to or smaller than your calibration frequency span.XXX DATA PTS The program automatically sets the stepUSING ABOVE size, based on the selected start and stopSTART AND STOP frequencies. The step size will be theXXX.X MHz smallest possible (largest number of pointsSTEP SIZE up to a maximum of 501), based on the chosen frequency span.NEXT CAL STEP Displays the next menu in the calibration sequence.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________INSERTINDIVIDUALFREQUENCIESINPUT A FREQPRESS <ENTER>TO INSERTNEXT FREQ. Move the cursor here and enter the nextXX.XXXXXX GHz frequency for which you wish calibration data taken. If the AUTO INCR option is ON, pressing ENTER automatically increments the calibration frequency by the interval in GHz that appears the option.XXX FREQS. Shows the number of frequencies that youENTERED, have entered and reports the value of theLAST FREQ WAS last frequency entered.XX.XXXXXX GHzAUTO INCR ON Move the cursor here and press ENTER(OFF) to switch the Auto-Increment mode on orXX.XXXXXX GHz off. If AUTO INCR is on, you may enter the frequency spacing.PREVIOUS MENU Displays C2D Menu.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing ENTER will cause actions asTO SELECT described above.OR TURN ON/OFF______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SINGLE POINTCALIBRATIONC.W. FREQ Move cursor here and enter the frequencyXX.XXXXXX GHz for which calibration is to be done.FINISHED Move cursor here and press ENTERENTRY, NEXT when finished.CAL STEPINPUT FREQ AND Input the frequency value and press thePRESS <ENTER> ENTER key.TO SELECT______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________CALIBRATIONRANGEHARMONIC CALFORTIME DOMAINSTART (STEP) Move cursor here to enter the desiredXX.XXXXXX GHz start frequency. This frequency also will be used as the frequency increment.APPROX STOP Move the cursor here to enter theXX.XXXXXX GHz approximate desired stop frequency The frequency will be adjusted to the nearest harmonic multiple of the start frequency.USING ABOVE The program automatically indicates theSTART AND STOP number of data points and the trueWILL RESULT IN (harmonic) stop frequency.XXX DATAPOINTS ANDXX.XXXXXX GHzTRUE STOPNEXT CAL STEP Move the cursor here and press ENTERPRESS <ENTER> when finished.TO SELECT______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________FILL FREQUENCYRANGESINPUT START. This menu is used to create one or moreINCR. POINTS, ranges of discrete equally spacedTHEN SELECT frequency points for calibration."FILL RANGE"START FREQ Enter the first frequency of the range.0.5000 GHzINCREMENT Enter the increment (step size) between0.1004 GHz one frequency and the next.NUM OF PTS Enter the number of frequency points in82 POINTS the range.STOP FREQXX-XXXX GHzFILL RANGE Moving the cursor here and pressing(ENTERED ENTER fills the range and shows the82 FREQS) number of frequencies selected (in NUM OF PTS above).INSERT Calls Menu C2A, which allows you to setINDIVIDUAL the individual frequencies.FREQUENCIESFINISHED Calls Menu C3, the next menu in theENTRIES. NEXT calibration sequence.CAL STEPPRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________CONFIRMCALIBRATIONPARAMETERSPORT 1 CONN: Displays the connector type for which theSMA (M) calibration is set to correct. This should agree with the connector type on both your calibration components and the test device.PORT 2 CONN:SMA (F)LOAD TYPE Displays the type of load (termination)(BROADBAND) that you will use in the calibration. If you wish a different type, press the ENTER key to display Menu C4).CHANGE Move cursor to appropriate line and pressPORT 1 CONN ENTER to change connector type.CHANGE Move cursor to appropriate line and pressPORT 2 CONN ENTER to change connector type.CHANGE Move cursor to appropriate line and pressLOAD TYPE ENTER to change load type.START CAL Starts the calibration sequence.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SELECT PORT 1 or 2CONNECTOR TYPESMA (M) Applies the four capacitance-coefficientSMA (F) values to the Open that are needed to correct for an SMA connector being installed on the test device. Refer to paragraph 3-11.4, "Using Calibration Standards," for a discussion on this topic.K-CONNECTOR (M) Same as above, except for KK-CONNECTOR (F) Connector.TYPE N (M) Same as above, except for Type-NTYPE N (F) connector.GPC-7 Same as above, except for GPC-7 connector.OTHER Calls Menu C12, which allow you to specify the connector coefficients.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SELECTCALIBRATIONTYPEKEEP EXISTING Keeps the existing calibration data, thenCAL DATA exits the calibration sequence by calling up Menu C13.FULL 12-TERM Corrects for error terms E.sub.TF, E.sub.TR, E.sub.RF, E.sub.RR, E.sub.DF, E.sub.DR, E.sub.XF, E.sub.XR, E.sub.SF. E.sub.SR, E.sub.LF, and E.sub.LR (FIG. 3-39), which are all of the error-terms associated with a two-port measurement. Refer to paragraph 3-11.1, "Explaining Measurement Accuracy," for a detailed decussion of these error terms.1 PATH Corrects for forward-direction error2 PORT terms E.sub.TF, E.sub.RF, E.sub.DF, and E.sub.SF.FREQUENCY Corrects for forward-direction errorRESPONSE ONLY terms E.sub.RF, and E.sub.DF. These provide a frequency-response-only correction for Port 1.REFLECTION Corrects for forward-direction errorONLY (PORT 1) terms E.sub.RF, E.sub.DF, and E.sub.SF. These provide a reflection-only correction for Port 1.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SELECTFREQUENCYRESPONSE TYPETRANSMISSION For the calibration-correction of the transmission-only frequency-response error term.REFLECTION For the calibration-correction of the reflection-only frequency-response error term.BOTH For the calibration-correction of both transmission and reflection frequency- response error terms.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your selection.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SELECTTYPE OF LOADBROADBAND Selects calibration based on theFIXED LOAD broadband load being used.SLIDING LOAD Selects calibration based on the sliding(FREQS BELOW load being used. If your low-end2 GHz ALSO frequency is below 2 GHz, a fixedREQUIRE FIXED broadband load is also required.BROADBAND LOAD)PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________CALIBRATIONSEQUENCECONNECTCALIBRATIONDEVICES:PORT 1: Connect the required components to Port 1.XXXXXXXXXXXXPORT 2: Connect the required components to Port 2.XXXXXXXXXXXXMESSAGE AREA(See FIG. 3-47______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________CALIBRATIONSEQUENCESLIDE LOAD Slide the load to the next position,TO POSITION X then press the ENTER key. Moving the slide to six different positions provides sufficient data for the program to accurately calculate the effective directory of the system______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________CALIBRATIONSEQUENCECONNECT Connect Ports 1 and 2 together usingTHROUGHLINE the Throughline cableBETWEENTEST PORTS______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________CALIBRATIONSEQUENCECOMPLETEDPRESS Pressing the SAVE/RECALL MENU<SAVE/RECALL> Key displays Menu SR that lets youTO STORE CAL save your calibration data onto a diskDATA ON DISK or recall previously saved calibration data from a disk. While this menu provides a convenient point at which to save the calibration data, it is not the only point allowed. You can use the SAVE/RECALL MENU key at any point inOR the measurment program.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO PROCEED your menu selection.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________PORT 1 OR 2 Enter the capacitance-coefficient valuesOPEN DEVICE needed to correct for your Open device.ENTER THECAPACITANCECOEFFICIENTSTERM 1-CO Enter the term 1 coefficient value..+-.XXX.XXe-15TERM 2-C1 Enter the term 2 coefficient value..+-.XXX.XXe-27TERM 3-C2 Enter the term 3 coefficient value..+-.XXX.XXe-36TERM 3-C3 Enter the term 3 coefficient value..+-.XXX.XXe-45ENTER THE Enter the offset length value needed toOFFSET LENGTH correct for your Open deviceOFFSET LENGTH.+-.XXX.XX mmPRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsWHEN COMPLETE your menu selection______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________PORT 2SHORT DEVICEENTER THE Enter the length that the Short is offsetOFFSET LENGTH from the reference plane.OFFSET LENGTH.+-.XXX.XXX mmPRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsWHEN COMPLETE your menu selection.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________EXISTING Retains the existing calibration data inCALIBRATION memory. At the end of three seconds, theKEPT appropriate measurement setuop menu appears.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU TEXT DESCRIPTION______________________________________SAVE/RECALLFRONT PANELINFORMAITONSAVE Displays Menu SR2, which asks you toRECALL select a storage location- internal memeory or disk.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remainsFUNCTION on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU TEXT DESCRIPTION______________________________________RECALL (or SAVE)FRONT PANEL Calls Menu SR3, which letsSETUP IN you save the control panel setupINTERNAL into or recalls it fromMEMORY internal memory.CAL DATA Saves the calibration data and controlAND FRONT panel setup onto the disk or recallsPANEL SETUP them from the disk. This selectionON DISK displays Menu DSK9(recall) or DSK11, and GP1-3(save) which asks you to select a disk file.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected-for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SAVE TOINTERNALMEMORYMEMORY 1 Causes the current control (front) panel setup to be saved to memory location 1.MEMORY 2 Same as above, except the setup saves to memory location 2.MEMORY 3 Same as above, except the setup saves to memory location 3MEMORY 4 Same as above, except the setup saves to memory location 4PRESS <ENTER> You may press the ENTER keyTO SELECT or use the keypad to impelementOR your menu selection. The menu remainsUSE KEYPAD on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________WARNINGINTERNAL Warns that the setup you are attemptingMEMORY to recall is not compatible with theDOES NOT calibration data stored in memory.MATCHCURRENTCAL SETUPCONTINUING Recalling the setup in question willRECALL WILL destroy the calibration data storedDESTROY in memory.CURRENT CALPRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key recalls theTO RECALL selected setup, while pressing the CLEAROR key aborts the selection.PRESS <CLEAR>TO ABORT______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SWEEP SETUPSTART Enter the sweep-start frequency in GHz.XX.XXXXXX GHz The start frequency must be lower than the stop frequency.STOP Enter the sweep-stop frequency in GHz.XX.XXXXXX GHz The stop frequency must be higher than the start frequency.XXX DATA PTS Displays the number of frequency pointsUSING ABOVE and the spacing between points for theSTART AND STOP start and stop frequencies selectedXXX.X MHz above. The number of points shownSTEP SIZE provides the finest frequency resolution possible, based on your DATA POINTS key MAXIMUM-NORMAL- MINIMUM selection.C.W. MODE ON Move cursor here and press ENTER toXX.XXXXXX GHz enable the CW mode. Enter CW frequency for measurements.MARKER SWEEP Move cursor here and press ENTER to set the start and stop frequencies (SU5) or the CW frequency (SU6) to the values of any markerHOLD BUTTON Displays Menu SU4, which lets youFUNCTION set the action of the HOLD key.REDUCED TEST Displays Menu SU2, which lets youSIGNALS set the source power and the values for the attenuators in the Model 3620 Series Test Set.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER keyTO SELECT implements your menu selection. TheOR TURN ON/OFF menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SWEEP SETUPREDUCEDTEST SIGNALSSOURCE POWER Enter the output-power level for the.+-.XX.XdBm sweep generator (frequency source) in dBm.PORT 1 SOURCE Attenuates the microwave sourceX0 dB (0-70) power from 0 to 70 dB, in 10 dB steps. The power is attenuated before being applied to Port 1 for a forward transmission or reflection test (S.sub.21 or S.sub.11, respectively).PORT 2 SOURCE Attenuates the microwave sourceX0 dB (0-70) power from 0 to 70 dB, in 10 dB steps. The power is attenuated before being applied to Port 2 for a reverse transmission or reflection test (S.sub.12 or S.sub.22, respectively).PORT 2 TEST Attenuates from 0 to 40 dB (10 dB steps)X0 dB (0-40) the microwave power being input(THIS REDUCES to Port 2 from theSIGNAL FROM device-under-test (DUT).AMPLIFIERUNDER TEST)______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SINGLE POINTMEASUREMENTSETUPC.W. FREQ Enter the measurement frequency in GHzXX.XXXXXX GHz for continuous wave (CW) operation.HOLD BUTTON Displayes Menu SU4, which lets youFUNCTION set the action of the HOLD key.REDUCED TEST Displays Menu SU2, which lets youSIGNALS set values for the source power and attenuators in the Model 3620 Series Test Set.RETURN TO Move cursor here and press ENTER toSWEEP MODE return to the F1-F2 sweep mode. (Menu SU1)PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SELECT FUNC-TION FORHOLD BUTTONHOLD/CONTINUE Causes the hold key (button) to stop and start the sweep.HOLD/RESTART Causes the hold key to stop and restart the sweep.SINGLE SWEEP Causes the hold key to trigger a singleAND HOLD sweep and hold when finished. (Two sweeps, one from Port 1 to 2 and another from Port 2 to 1, are accomplished for a 12-Term measurement.)PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER keyTO SELECT implements your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________FREQUENCYMARKER SWEEPSTART SWEEP Pressing a number on the keypad causesMARKER (n) the associated marker to be theXX.XXXX GHz start frequency of the sweep.STOP SWEEP Pressing a number on the keypad causesMARKER (n) the associated marker to be theXX.XXXX GHz stop frequency of the sweep.USE KEYPAD Use the keypad to select markersTO SELECT 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.MARKER (1-6)______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________FREQUENCYMARKER C.W.C.W. FREQ Pressing a number on the keypad causesMARKER (n) the associated marker to beXX.XXXX GHz the C.W. frequency.USE KEYPAD Use the keypad to select markersTO SELECT 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6.MARKER (1-6)______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SELECTDISPLAY MODESINGLE Selects a single channel for display,DISPLAY which can be log magnitude, phase, log magnitude and phase, or Smith chart. You select the type of display in Menu GT.DUAL Selects Channels 1 and 3 for display.DISPLAY You select the type of displayCHANNEL 1-3 in Menu GT.DUAL Selects Channels 2 and 4 for display. YouDISPLAY select the type of display in Menu GT.CHANNEL 2-4ALL FOUR Selects all four channels for display. YouCHANNELS select the type of display in Menu GT.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SELECTS-PARAMETERS21 Selects the S.sub.21 parameter to beFWD TRANS displayed on the active channel. The parameter can be displayed in any of the available formats.S11 Selects the S.sub.11 parameter to beFWD REFL displayed on the active channel. The parameter can be displayed in any of the available formats.S12 Selects the S.sub.12 parameter to beREV TRANS displayed on the active channel. The parameter can be displayed in any of the available formats.S22 Selects the S.sub.22 parameter to beREV REFL displayed on the active channel. The parameter can be displayed in any of the available formats.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SELECTGRAPH TYPELOG Selects a log magnitude graph for displayMAGNITUDE on the active channel's selected s-parameter. The active channel is indicated by its key (CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4) being lit.PHASE Selects a phase graph for display on the active channel.LOG MAGNITUDE Selects log magnitude and phase graphsAND PHASE for display on the active channel.SMITH CHART Selects a Smith chart for display(IMPEDANCES) on the active channel.SWR Selects an SWR display for the active channel.GROUP DELAY Selects a Group Delay display for the active channel.MORE Takes you to additional graph type selections on Menu GT2.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT AND your menu selection and resumes theRESUME calibration from where it left off, if in theCALIBRATION calibration mode. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SELECTGRAPH TYPEADMITTANCE Selects an Admittance Smith chart forSMITH CHART display on the active channel's s-parameter.LINEAR POLAR Selects a Linear Polar graph for display on the active channel's s-parameter.LOG POLAR Selects a Log Polar graph for display of the active channel's s-parameter.LINEAR MAG Selects a Linear Magnitude graph for display on the active channel's s-parameter.LINEAR MAG Selectes Linear Magnitude andAND PHASE Phase graphs for display on the channel's s-parameter.REAL Selects Real data for display on the active channel's s-parameter.IMAGINARY Selects Imaginary data for display on the active channel's s-parameter.REAL AND Selects both Real and Imaginary data forIMAGINARY display on the active channel's s-parameter.MORE Takes you to additional graph type selectionsPRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT AND your menu selection and resumes theRESUME calibration from where it left off, ifCALIBRATION in the calibration mode. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________TRACE MEMORYFUNCTIONSVIEW DATA Displays measured data; that is, the data presently being taken.VIEW MEMORY Displays stored data; that is, data that was previously taken and stored in memory.VIEW DATA Displays measured data superimposedAND MEMORY over stored data.VIEW DATA + Displays measured data divided byMEMORY stored data.SELECT Takes you to Menu NO2 for selection ofTRACE MATH the type of math operation to be performed.STORE DATA Stores the measured data to internalTO MEMORY memory.DISK Brings up Menu NO3, which allows dataFUNCTIONS to be stored to or recalled from the disk.MEMORY DATA Indicates the reference delay applied toREF, DELAY the memory data being displayed.XXX.XXX CMPRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection and remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SELECTTRACE MATHADD (+) Selects DATA + MEMORY as the math function.SUBTRACT (-) Selects DATA - MEMORY as the math function.MULTIPLY (.times.) Selects DATA .times. MEMORY as the math function.DIVIDE (.div.) Selects DATA .div. MEMORY as the math function.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu returns to the NO1 menu.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________TRACE MEMORYDISK FUNCTIONSCHANNEL X Indicates the channel to be used (active channel).STORE TO DISK Displays GP1-3 or DSK11 menu to select file store data from selected channel on diskRECALL FROM Displays DSK9 menu to selectDISK file to recall from disk.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SETREFERENCEDELAYAUTO Automatically sets the reference delay so that the cumulative phase shift is zero. This selection unwinds the phase in a Smith chart display or reduces the phase revolutions in a rectilinear display to less than one.DISTANCE Electrically repositions the measurementXXX.XXX mm reference plane, as displayed on the active channel, by a distance value entered in millimeters. This selection lets you compensate for the phase reversals inherent in a length of transmission line connected between the test set's Port 1 connector and the device-under-test (DUT).TIME Electrically repositions the measurementXXX.XXX ms reference plane by a distance value that corresponds to the time in milliseconds.SET Displays Menu RD2, which lets youDIELECTRIC enter a value for the dielectric constant of your transmission line.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SETDIELECTRICCONSTANTAIR Calculates reference delay based on(1.000) dielectric constant of air (1).POLYETHYLENE Calculates reference delay based on(2.260) the dielectric constant of polyethylene (2.26).TEFLON Calculates reference delay based on the(2.100) dielectric constant of teflon (2.1).MICROPOROUS Calculates reference delay based on the(1.69) dielectric constant of microporous teflon (1.687).OTHER Calculates reference delay based on theXXXX.XX value you enter. Terminate your entry using any terminator and select with the ENTER key.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection and returns you to the RD1 menu.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SET SCALINGOR PRESS<AUTOSCALE>LOG MAG-RESOLUTION Sets the resolution for the vertical axisXX.XXX dB/DIV of the active channel's displayed log magnitude graph. Resolution can by set incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob. For the linear polar graph, the center is fixed at 0 units; therefore, changing the resolution also changes the reference value and vice versaREF VALUE Sets the value by which the activeXXX.XXX dB channel's amplitude measurement is offset on the log-magnitude graph. The offset can be set in increments of 0.001 dB using the keypad or rotary knob.REFERENCE Sets the reference line for the activeLINE channel's amplitude measurement on the log-magnitude graph. This is the line about which the amplitude expands with different resolution values. The reference line can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.PHASE-RESOLUTION Sets the resolution for the verticalXX.XX DEG/DIV axis of the active channel's displayed phase graph. Resolution can by set incrementally using the keypad or rotary knob.REF VALUE Sets the value by which the activeXXX.XX DEG channel's phase measurement is offset on the phase graph. The offset can be set in increments of 0.01 degrees using the keypad or rotary knob.REFERENCE Sets the reference line for the activeLINE channel's phase measurements on the phase graph. This is the line about which the phase expands with different resolution values. The reference line can be set to any vertical division using the rotary knob.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SET SCALINGOR PRESS<AUTOSCALE>IMPEDANCE Scales an Impedance Smith chart for(ADMITTANCE) display in the active channel.SMITH CHARTNORMAL SMITH Selects a normal Smith chart for display(REFL = 1.000 in the active channel.FULL SCALE)EXPAND 10 dB Selects a dB expansion of the Smith chart(REFL = 0.316 being displayed for the active channel.FULL SCALE)EXPAND 20 dB Selects a 20 dB expansion of the Smith(REFL = 0.099 chart being displayed for theFULL SCALE) active channel.EXPAND 30 dB Selects a 30 dB expansion of the Smith(REFL = 0.031 chart being displayed for theFULL SCALE) active channel.COMPRESS 3 dB Selects a 3 dB compression of the Smith(REFL = 1.413 Chart being displayed for theFULL SCALE) active channel.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT AND your menu selection and resumes theRESUME calibration from where it left off,CALIBRATION if in the calibration mode. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________DATAENHANCEMENTAVERAGING Averages the measured data over time,XXXX MEAS. as follows:PER POINT 1. The sweep stops at the first frequency point and takes a number of readings, based on the selected numbvr of points. 2. The program averages the readings and writes the average value for that frequency point in the displayed graph. 3. The sweep then advances to the next sequential frequency point and repeats the process.SMOOTHING Smoothes the measured data overXX.X PERCENT frequency, as follows:OF SPAN 1. The program divides the overall sweep into smaller segments, based on the selected percent-of-span. (Refer to paragraphs 3-5.3 and FIG. 3-29 for a description and example of smoothing.) 2. It takes a data reading at each frequency point within that percent- of-span segment. 3. It averages the readings with a raised Hamming window and writes that magnitude value at the mid-frequency point of the segment in the displayed graph or Smith chart. 4. It then advances the percent-of-span segment to encompass the next sequential group of frequency points and repeats the process.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________DATAENHANCEMENTAVERAGING Averages the measured data over time,XXXX MEAS. as follows:PER POINT 1. The sweep stops at the first frequency point and takes a number of readings, based on the selected number of points. 2. The program averages the readings and writes the average value for that frequency point in the displayed graph. 3. The sweep then advances to the next sequential frequency point and repeats the process.SMOOTHING Smoothes the measured data overXX.X PERCENT frequency, as follows:OF SPAN 1. The program divides the overall sweep into smaller segments, based on the selected percent-of-span. (Refer to paragraphs 3-5.3 and FIG. 3-29 for a description and example of smoothing.) 2. It takes a data reading at each frequency point within that percent- of-span segment. 3. It averages the readings with a raised Hamming window and writes that magnitude value at the mid-frequency point of the segment in the displayed graph or Smith chart. 4. It then advances the percent-of-span segment to encompass the next sequential group of frequency points and repeats the process.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SELECT OUTPUTDEVICEPRINTER Selects the printer as your output device.PLOTTER Selects the plotter as your output device.SELECT PRINTEROUTPUT TYPEFULL SCREEN Prints full-screen data, including the menu entries.GRAPH ONLY Prints only the graph or Smith chart, including any and all data it contains.TABULAR DATA Prints a tabulation of the measured data.OUTPUT OPTIONSSET UP OUTPUT Calls Menu PM2, which allows you toHEADERS enter the header information.DISK Calls Menu PM4, which allows you toOPERATION select disk operations.PLOT OPTIONS Calls Menu PL1, which allows you toPRESS <ENTER> select between several plot options.TO SELECT Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________DATA OUTPUTHEADERSMODEL ON (OFF) Selecting <1> displays MenuXXXXXXXXXXXXXX GP5, which lets you select the letters and/or numbers in your model identifier.DEVICE ID Selecting <1> displays MenuON (OFF) GP5, which lets you select the lettersXXXXXXXXXXXX and/or numbers in your Device I.D. identifier.DATE ON (OFF) Selecting <1> displays MenuXX/XX/XX GP5, which lets you select the letters and/or numbers in the date.OPERATOR Selecting <1> displays MenuON (OFF) GP5, which lets you select the lettersXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX identifying the operator.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key selectsTO TURN ON/OFF between menu selections. PressingOR the CLEAR/RET LOC key lets youPRESS <1> change the between ON and OFFTO CHANGE states Pressing <1> lets you enter the desired label in Menu GP5.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTIONS______________________________________TABULAR OUTPUTFORMATMARKER ON (OFF) Provides for the printing orDATA not of markers.SWEEP ON (OFF) Provides for the printing or notDATA of frequency sweep data. If you elect to print the sweep data, you can choose how many frequency points to print out.XXX POINTS Outputs one point every X pointsPRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO TURN ON/OFF your menu selection. The menu remainsOR on the screen until another menu isTURN KNOB TO selected for display or until theCHANGE NUMBER CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.OF POINTS Turning the knob on number of points changes the value of X to define the number of points printed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________DISK OUTPUTOPERATIONSTABULAR DATA Outputs tabular data to the disk andTO DISK takes you to GP1-3 or DSK 11 for selection of a file name.TABULAR DATA Brings up DSK9 for selection of aFROM DISK measurement data file to be outputTO PRINTER to the printer.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________PLOT OPTIONSPLOTFULL PLOT The plotter will plot everything displayed on the screen (data traces, graticule, menu text) when START PRINT is pressed.OPTIONSHEADER ON (OFF) The plot will include on information header if this option is on and START PRINT is pressed.MENU ON (OFF) The plot will include the menu text if this option is on and START PRINT is pressed.MARKERS ON The plot will include any marker or(OFF) AND limit lines if this option is on and STARTLIMITS PRINT is pressed.GRATICULE ON The plot will include the graticule and(OFF) annotation if this option is on and START PRINT is pressed. The plotter plots the graticule.DATA ON (OFF) The plot will include the data if thisTRACE(S) option is on and START PRINT is pressed. The plotter plots the graticule.FORMATPLOT SIZE Calls Menu PL2, which lets you select the size and location of the plot.PEN COLORS Calls Menu PL3, which lets you select pen colors for the various elements of the plot: graticule, data traces, menu text and header. Also lets you select the relative pen speed.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remainsOR TURN ON/OFF on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SELECTPLOT SIZEFULL SIZE Selects a full size (page) plot.QUARTERSIZE PLOTS-UPPER LEFT Selects a quarter-size plot, upper-left quadrant.UPPER RIGHT Selects a quarter-size plot, upper-right quadrant.LOWER LEFT Selects a quarter-size plot, lower-left quadrant.LOWER RIGHT Selects a quarter-size plot, lower-right quadrant.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SELECTPEN COLORSDATA PEN Selects the color in which the data willn be plotted. The number of the pen displays where the "n" is shown.GRATICLE PEN Selects the color in which the graticulen will be plotted. The number of the pen displays where the "n" is shown.MARKERS AND Selects the color in which the markersLIMITS PEN and limits will be plotted.n The number of the pen displays where the "n" is shown.HEADER PEN Selects the color in which the headern information will be plotted. The number of the pen displays where the "n" is shown.PEN SPEED Selects the pen's speed as a percentage100 PERCENT of the plotter's maximum speed. (UsedOF MAXIMUM to optimize plots on transparencies or with worn pens.)PREVIOUS MENU Recalls Menu PL1.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________Function Default Setting______________________________________INSTRUMENT Measurement Setup Menu DisplayedSTATEMEASUREMENT Maximum sweep range of source and test set Source Power: 0.0 dBm Resolution: NormalCHANNEL Quad (four-channel) display Channel 1 activeDISPLAY Channel 1: S.sub.11, 1:1 Smith Chart Channel 2: S.sub.12, Log Magnitude and Phase Channel 3: S.sub.21, Log Magnitude and Phase Channel 4: S.sub.22, 1:1 Smith Chart Scale: 10 dB/Division or 90.degree./Division Offset: 0.000dB or 0.00 degree Reference Position: Midscale Electrical Delay: 0.00 seconds Dielectric: 1.00 (air) Normalization: Off Normalization Sets: UnchangedENHANCEMENT Video IF Bandwidth: Reduced Averaging: Off Smoothing: OFFCALIBRATION Correction: Off Connector: SMA Load: BroadbandMARKERS LIMITS Markers On/Off: All off Markers Enabled/Disabled: All enabled Marker Frequency: All set to the start- sweep frequency or start-time distance .DELTA.Reference: OffSYSTEM STATE Limits: All set to reference position value; all off (all enabled) GP/B Addresses and Terminators: Unchanged Frequency Blanking: Disengaged, Error(s): All cleared Measurement: RestartedOUTPUT Output Type: Printer (full screen, clear headers) Marker and Sweep Data: Enabled______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SELECT UTILITYFUNCTION TYPEGENERAL DISK Calls Menu U2, which lets you selectUTILITIES between several disk utilities.CALIBRATION Calls Menu U4, which lets you selectCOMPONENT between several calibration-componentUTILITIES utilities.GPIB Displays the current GPIB addresses ofADDRESSES the various system instruments.DISPLAY Calls Menu U3, which lets you displayINSTRUMENT the various instrument stateSTATE parameters.BLANK Blanks all frequency-identifier informationFREQUENCY from the 360 displays, if such informationINFORMATION is presently being displayed.ALTERNATE 3RD Switches between blue and cyan colorsCOLOR PLANEPRESS <ENTER> Switches between blue and cyanTO SELECT colors Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________DISK UTILITYFUNCTIONSRESTOREDISPLAYDISPLAY DISK Displays disk directory in data areaDIRECTORYDELETE FILES Calls Menu DSK2, which lets you deleteFROM DISK files from the disk.LOAD PROGRAM Reloads the operating programFROM DISK from the disk.TO 360 ##STR1##INITIALIZE Prepares (formats or initializes) the diskDISK WITH for use with the 360, including thePROGRAM operating program.INITIALIZE Prepares the disk for use with the 360 butDATA-ONLY does not copy the operating programDISK to the disk ##STR2##COPY DISK Lets you copy one disk to another.TO DISK______________________________________
______________________________________MENU U3 DESCRIPTION______________________________________ DISPLAY INSTRUMENT STATE RESTORE Restores the normal data display. DISPLAYA SYSTEM Displays all of the system parameters PARAMETERS (Readout Text U4 a thru e. FIG. 3-101).B CALIBRATION Displays the calibration parameters. PARAMETERSC GLOBAL Displays the global operating OPERATING parameters. PARAMETERSD CHANNEL 1-2 Displays the Channel 1-2 OPERATING operating parameters. PARAMETERSE CHANNEL 3-4 Displays the Channel 3-4 OPERATING operating parameters. PARAMETERS NEXT PAGE Alternately displays Readout Text U4 a thru e. PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements TO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________Readout Text U3e, Calibration ParametersParameter Display Format______________________________________Number Of Points XXXSource Power XXX dBmCal Type xxxxStart Frequency XX.XXX GHzStop Frequency XX.XXX GHzLoad Type XXXXXXXXXConnectorPORT1-PORT2- XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXOpen Device *NOT INSTALLED *NOT INSTALLED C0 (e-15)XXX.XXXXXX.XXX C1 (e-27)XXX.XXXXXX.XXX C2 (e-36)XXX.XXXXXX.XXX C3 (e-45)XXX.XXXXXX.XXX Offset LengthXXX.XXX mmXXX.XXX mm .cndot. Serial Number XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXShort Device *NOT INSTALLED *NOT INSTALLED Offset LengthXXX.XXX mmXXX.XXX mm Serial Number XXXXXXXXX XXXXXXXXXAtten Settings Source XXdB XX. dB Test XX dB______________________________________ *If not installed, displays "NOT INSTALLEED"-
______________________________________MENU U4 DESCRIPTION______________________________________CALIBRATIONCOMPONENTUTILITIESINSTALL Reads into memory the coefficient dataCALIBRATION from the calibration-components diskCOMPONENT supplied with the calibration kits.INFORMATIONFROM DISKDISPLAY Calls Menu U5, which lets you display theINSTALLED connector information for theCALIBRATION various connectors supported.COMPONENTINFORMATIONPRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU U5 DESCRIPTION______________________________________DISPLAY This menu lets you view coefficient dataINSTALLED on the components listed (FIG. 3-104).CALIBRATION The data appears in the display area of theCOMPONENT screen.INFORMATIONSMA (M) Select coefficient data to display for the SMA male components.SMA (F) Select coefficient data to display for the SMA female components.K - CONN (M) Select coefficient data to display for the K Connector .TM. male components.K - CONN (F) Select coefficient data to display for the K Connector female components.TYPE N (M) Select coefficient data to display for the Type N male components.TYPE N (F) Select coefficient data to display for the Type N female components.GPC - 7 Select coefficient data to display for the sexless GPC-7 components.NEXT Cycles through selections SMA (M)COMPONENT to GPG7.PREVIOUS MENU Displays menu U4.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DSK3 DESCRIPTION______________________________________NO ROOM FORNEW DATA FILESOVERWRITE Allows you to overwrite an existing fileEXISTING on the current data disk.FILESDELETE Allows you to delete an existing file onEXISTING the current data disk.FILESPRESS <ENTER> Pressing ENTER implements your menuTO SELECT selection. You will be returned to the previous menu when your selection is made.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DSK4 DESCRIPTION______________________________________DISK UTILITYFUNCTIONSDELETE CAL & Allows you to delete specific calibrationFRONT PANEL and control (front) panel setup files fromSETUPS FROM the current data disk.DISKDELETE Allows you to delete specificNORMALIZATION normalization (trace memory) files fromFILES FROM the current data disk.DISKDELETE Allows you to delete specific measure-MEASUREMENT ment data files from the current data disk.FILES FROMDISKPREVIOUS MENU Returns you to the previous menuPRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEARE/LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DSK5 DESCRIPTION______________________________________SELECT CAL &FRONT PANELSETUP TODELETEFILENAME 2 Selects the file named on this line to be deleted. (The actual name of the file, not "FILENAME 2" will appear.)FILENAME 3 Same as for Filename 2 above.FILENAME 4 Same as for Filename 2 above.FILENAME 5 Same as for Filename 2 above.FILENAME 6 Same as for Filename 2 above.FILENAME 7 Same as for Filename 2 above.FILENAME 8 Same as for Filename 2 above.FILENAME 9 Same as for Filename 2 above.MORE The "More" option only displays if there are more than nine files.PREVIOUS MENU Returns to the previous menu in this series.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. You are returned to the previous menu.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DSK6 DESCRIPTION______________________________________SELECTNORMALIZATIONFILE TODELETEFILENAME 1 Selects the file named on this line to be deleted. (The actual name of the file, not "FILENAME 1" will appear.)FILENAME 2 Same as for Filename 1 above.FILENAME 3 Same as for Filename 1 above.FILENAME 4 Same as for Filename 1 above.FILENAME 5 Same as for Filename 1 above.FILENAME 6 Same as for Filename 1 above.FILENAME 7 Same as for Filename 1 above.FILENAME 8 Same as for Filename 1 above.MORE The "More" option only displays if there are more than nine files.PREVIOUS MENU Returns to the previous menu in this series.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. You are returned to the previous menu.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DSK7 DESCRIPTION______________________________________SELECTMEASUREMENTFILE TODELETEFILENAME 1 Selects the file named on this line to be deleted. (The actual name of the file, not "FILENAME 1" will appear.)FILENAME 2 Same as for Filename 1 above.FILENAME 3 Same as for Filename 1 above.FILENAME 4 Same as for Filename 1 above.FILENAME 5 Same as for Filename 1 above.FILENAME 6 Same as for Filename 1 above.FILENAME 7 Same as for Filename 1 above.FILENAME 8 Same as for Filename 1 above.MORE The "More" option only displays if there are more than nine files.PREVIOUS MENU Returns to the previous menu in this series.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. You are returned to the previous menu______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DSK9 DESCRIPTION______________________________________SELECT FILETO READFILENAME 1 Selects the file named on this line to be read. (The actual name of the file, not "FILENAME 1" will appear.)FILENAME 2 Same as for Filename 1 above.FILENAME 3 Same as for Filename 1 above.FILENAME 4 Same as for Filename 1 above.FILENAME 5 Same as for Filename 1 above.FILENAME 6 Same as for Filename 1 above.FILENAME 7 Same as for Filename 1 above.FILENAME 8 Same as for Filename 1 above.MORE The "More" option only displays if there are more than nine files.PREVIOUS MENU Returns to the previous menu in this seriesPRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. You are returned to the previous menu.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU GP1-3 DESCRIPTION______________________________________SELECT FILETO OVERWRITEORCREATE NEWFILEFILENAME 1 Selects disk File 1 for storing the calibration data or front (control) panel setup. Name the file using Menu GP5.FILENAME 2 Selects disk File 2 for storage of data.FILENAME 3 Selects disk File 3 for storage of data.FILENAME 4 Selects disk File 4 for storage of data.FILENAME 5 Selects disk File 5 for storage of data.FILENAME 6 Selects disk File 6 for storage of data.FILENAME 7 Selects disk File 7 for storage of data.FILENAME 8 Selects disk File 8 for storage of data.MORE Displays additional menus.PREVIOUS MENU Displays the previous menu.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________MENU GP5 DESCRIPTION__________________________________________________________________________SELECT NAME Name your file using the rotary knob to select letters, numbers, or both. A letter or number turns red to indicate that the letter/number has beenABCDEFGHIJKLM chosen for selection. Pressing the ENTER key selects the letter or num- ber. The name you spell out displays in the area below "SELECT NAME."NOPQRSTUVWXYZ You are allowed up to eight characters for a file name and twelve charac- ters for a label.0123456789-/#DEL CLEAR DONE Selecting "DEL" deletes the last letter in the name displayed above. Selecting "CLEAR" deletes the entire name. Selecting "DONE" signals that you have finished writing the name.TURN KNOB Use the rotary knob to indicate the letter or number you wish to select.TO INDICATE You can use the up-arrow and down-arrow keys to move between rows.CHARACTER ORFUNCTIONPRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. The menuTO MAKE SELECTION remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.NUMBERS MAY You may also select numbers using the keypad.ALSO BESELECTEDUSING KEYPAD__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________MENU GP7 DESCRIPTION__________________________________________________________________________GPIB SETUP360 GPIB-CR/CR-LF Selects either the CR (carriage return) character or the CR-LF (Carriage Return-Line Feed) characters as the data terminator for GPIB transmis- sions.ADDRESS: Selects the GPIB address for the 360 analyzer. The 360 is set to address6 6 before leaving the factory.SYSTEM BUS-CR/CR-LF Selects either the CR (carriage return) character or the CR-LF (Carriage Return-Line Feed) characters as the data terminator for System Bus transmissions.INSTR ADDR Selects the address for the System Bus controller. This is the address the0 360 uses to address the Source. The 360 is set to address 0 before leav- ing the factory.SOURCE ADDR Selects the address for the Source. The Source is set to address 5 before5 leaving the factory.PLOTTER ADDR Selects the address for a compatible plotter.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. The menuTOSELECT remains on the screen until another menu is selected for displayor until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________MENU M1 DESCRIPTION__________________________________________________________________________SET MARKERSMARKER 1 ON (OFF) Turns Marker 1 on or off (activates or deactivates). When on (active), theXX.XXXXXX GHz frequency, time, or distance may be set using the keypad or rotary knob. NOTE In this text, markers will be referred to as being active and as being selected. Any marker that has been turned on and as- signed a frequency is considered to be active. The marker to which the cursor presently points is considered to be selected. The selected marker is the only one for which you can change the frequency.MARKER 2 .DELTA.REFXX.XXXXXX GHzMARKER 3 ON (OFF) Turns Marker 3 on or off (activates or deactivates). When on (active), theXX.XXXXXX GHz frequency, time, or distance may be set using the keypad or rotary knob.MARKER 4ON (OFF) Turns Marker 4 on or off (activates or deactivates). When on (active), the frequency, time, or distance may be set using the keypad or rotary knob.MARKER 5ON (OFF) Turns Marker 5 on or off (activates or deactivates). When on (active), the frequency, time, or distance may be set using the keypad or rotary knob.MARKER 6ON (OFF) Turns Marker 6 on or off (activates or deactivates). When on (active), theXX.XXXXXX GHz frequency, time, or distance may be set using the keypad or rotary knob.MARKERS Disables all markers.DISABLED.DELTA.REF MODE ON (OFF) Selects and deselects the .DELTA.Reference ModeSELECT .DELTA.REF Calls Menu M2, which lets you select the .DELTA.REF Marker.MARKERPRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. The menuOR TURN ON/OFF remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or untilTO SELECT the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________MENU M2 DESCRIPTION__________________________________________________________________________SELECT.DELTA.REF MARKERMARKER 1 Marker 1 only appears if it has been activated in Menu M1. Placing theXX.XXXXXX GHz cursor on Marker 1 and pressing the ENTER key here selects it as the .DELTA.REF marker. The .DELTA.REF marker is the one from which the other active markers are compared and their difference frequency measured and dis- played in Menu M3. The marker frequency may be set using the keypad or rotary knob.MARKER 3 Same as above, but for Marker 3XX.XXXXXX GHzMARKER 4 Same as above, but for Marker 4XX.XXXXXX GHzPRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. The menuTO SELECT remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________MENU M3 DESCRIPTION__________________________________________________________________________SELECTREADOUT MARKERMARKER 1 Displays the frequency and S-Parameter value(s) of Marker 1 on all CRT-XX.XXXXXX GHz displayed graphs and Smith Charts. The frequency of Marker 1 also dis- plays here. If Marker 1 was activated in Menu M2 as the REF marker, REF appears as shown for Marker M5 below.MARKER 2 Same as for above, but for Marker 2.XX.XXXXXX GHzMARKER 5 Same as for above, but for Marker 5.XX.XXXXXX GHz.DELTA.REF MODE Indicates the status of the .DELTA.REF mode.IS ONPRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. The menuTO SELECT remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________MENU M4 DESCRIPTION__________________________________________________________________________C H 1-S 1 1 Selects channel for readoutXX.XXX PS DLYMARKER 1 The selected marker-that is, the one to which the cursor points in MenuXX.XXXXXX GHz M1-and its frequency, time, or distance display here. This could be anyXX.XXX dB one of the six available markers: Marker 1 thru Marker 6.XXX.XXX DEGMARKER TO MAX Causes the active marker to go to the frequency with the greatest S- Parameter value on the active channel.MARKER TO MIN Causes the selected marker to go to the frequency with the smallest S- Parameter value on the active channel.2 XX.XXXX GHz Displays the frequency, magnitude, and phase of the active S ParameterXX.XXX dB at marker 2, if the marker is enabled.XXX.XXX DEG3 XX.XXXX GHz Displays the frequency, magnitude, and phase of the active S ParameterXX.XXX dB at marker 3, if the marker is enabled.XXX.XXX DEG4 XX.XXXX GHz Displays the frequency, magnitude, and phase of the active S ParameterXX.XXX dB at marker 4, if the marker is enabled.XXX.XXX DEG5 XX.XXXX GHz Displays the frequency, magnitude, and phase of the active S ParameterXX.XXX dB at marker 5, if the marker is enabled.XXX.XXX DEG6 XX.XXXX GHz Displays the frequency, magnitude, and phase of the active S ParameterXX.XXX dB at marker 6, if the marker is enabled.XXX.XXX DEG__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________MENU M5 DESCRIPTION__________________________________________________________________________CH 1 - S11XXX.XXX ns DLYMARKER 1 .DELTA.REF The REF marker, as activated in Menu M2, its frequency, its referenceXX.XXXXXX GHz delay, and the channel on which it appears display here. The REF markerMARKER TO MAX could be any one of the six available markers: M1-M6. The frequency ofMARKER TO MIN the REF marker can be changed using the keypad or rotary knob..DELTA.(1 - 2) The marker numbers of the REF marker and the next lowest-numberedXX.XXXXX GHz active marker appear between the parentheses. This example assumesXX.XXX dB Marker 1 as the Ref marker and Marker 2 as the next lowest-numbered(XXX.XX DEG) active marker. The lines below display the difference frequency, (or time/distance ) and trace value(s) between these two markers on the ac- tive channel..DELTA.(1 - 3) The marker numbers of the REF marker and the next lowest-numberedXX.XXXXX GHz active marker appear between the parentheses. This example assumesXX.XXX dB Marker 1 as the Ref marker and Marker 3 as the next lowest-numbered(XXX.XX DEG) active marker. The lines below display the difference frequency, (or time/distance ) and trace value(s) between these two markers on the ac- tive channel..DELTA.(1 - 4) The marker numbers of the REF marker and the next lowest-numberedXX.XXXXX GHz active marker appear between the parentheses. This example assumesXX.XXX dB Marker 1 as the Ref marker and Marker 4 as the next lowest-numbered(XXX.XX DEG) active marker. The lines below display the difference frequency, (or time/distance ) and trace value(s) between these two markers on the ac- tive channel..DELTA.(1 - 5) The marker numbers of the REF marker and the next lowest-numberedXX.XXXXX GHz active marker appear between the parentheses. This example assumesXX.XXX dB Marker 1 as the Ref marker and Marker5 as the next lowest-numbered(XXX.XX DEG) active marker. The lines below display the difference frequency, (or time/distance ) and trace value(s) between these two markers on the ac- tive channel..DELTA.(1 - 6) The marker numbers of the REF marker and the next lowest-numberedXX.XXXXX GHz active marker appear between the parentheses. This example assumesXX.XXX dB Marker 1 as the Ref marker and Marker 6 as the next lowest-numbered(XXX.XX DEG) active marker. The lines below display the difference frequency, (or time/distance ) and trace value(s) between these two markers on the ac- tive channel.__________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________MENU LFX DESCRIPTION______________________________________READOUT LIMIT This menu shows all of the frequenciesFREQUENCIES where the active S-Parameter value is equal to either Limit 1 or Limit 2.LOG MAG-LIMIT 1 (REF) Displays the value of Limit 1.x.xxx dBLIMIT 2 Displays the value of Limit 2.x.xxx dBLIMIT .DELTA.(1/2) Displays the difference in value betweenx.xxx dB Limit 1 and Limit 2.FREQUENCIES Displays all points where the S ParameterAT LIMIT 2 is equal to Limit 2.2.9843 GHz5.7210 GHz7.4412 GHz9.8764 GHz10.3901 GHz15.5648 GHz______________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________MENU L1 DESCRIPTION__________________________________________________________________________SET LIMITSLOG MAG-LIMIT 1 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 1 line on or off for the active channel. For your con-XXX.XXX dB venience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow you to delineate a go/no gl line on your log-magnitude graph beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.LIMIT 2 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 2 line on or off for the active channel on the log-mag-XXX.XXX dB nitude graph.READOUT LIMIT Displays Menu LF1, which shows all points where the currentFREQUENCIES s-parameter equals the limit values.PHASE-LIMIT 1 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 1 line on or off for the active channel on the phase graph.XXX.XX DEGLIMIT 2 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 2 line on or off for the active channel on the phase graph.XXX.XX DEGREADOUT LIMIT Displays Menu LF1, which shows all points where the currentFREQUENCIES s-parameter equals the limit values.LIMITS Enables both limit lines for the active channel on both the log-magnitudeENABLED and phase graphs.(DISABLED)PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. The menuTO SELECT remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or untilOR TURN ON/OFF the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION__________________________________________________________________________SET LIMITSLINEAR POLAR-(-SMITH CHART-)LIMIT 1 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 1 line on or off for the active channel. For your con-(XXX.XXX Mv venience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow you to delineate a go/no go line on your Smith chart or polar display beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.LIMIT 2 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 2 line on or off for the active channel on your Smith chart or polar display.XXX.XXX mVLIMITS Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the active channelENABLED on your Smith chart or polar display.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. The menuTO SELECT remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or untilOR TURN ON/OFF the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION__________________________________________________________________________SET LIMITSLOG MAG-LIMIT 1 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 1 line on or off for the active channel. For your con-XXX.XXX dB venience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow you to delineate a go/no go line on your Log Mag display beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.LIMIT 2 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 2 line on or off for the active channel on your Log Mag display.XXX.XXX dBREADOUT LIMIT Displays Menu LF1, which shows all points where the currentFREQUENCIES s-parameter equals the limit values.LIMITS Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the active channelENABLED on your Log Mag display.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. The menuTO SELECT remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or untilOR TURN ON/OFF the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION__________________________________________________________________________SET LIMITSPHASE-LIMIT I ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 1 line on or off for the active channel on the phase graph.XXX.XX DEGLIMIT 2 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 2 line on or off for the active channel on the phase graph.XXX.XX DEGREADOUT LIMIT Displays Menu LF1, which shows all points where the currentFREQUENCIES s-parameter equals the limit values.LIMITS Enables both limit lines for the active channel on a phase graph.ENABLEDPRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. The menuTO ELECT remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or untilOR TURN ON/OFF the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION__________________________________________________________________________SET LIMITSLOG POLAR-LIMIT 1 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 1 line on or off for the active channel. For your con-XXX.XXX dB venience, the arbitrarily set-limit lines allow you to delineate a go/no go line on your Log Polar display beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.LIMIT 2 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 2 line on or off for the active channel on your Log Polar display.XXX.XXX dBLIMITS Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the active channelENABLED on your Log Polar display.PRESS<ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. The menuTO SELECT remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or untilOR TURN ON/OFF the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION__________________________________________________________________________SET LIMITSGROUP DELAY-LIMIT 1 ON (OFF) Turns the limit 1 line on or off for the active channel. For your con-XXX.XXX dB venience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow you to delineate a go/no go line on your Group Delay display beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.LIMIT 2 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 2 line on or off for the active channel on your Group Delay display.XXX.XXX dBREADOUT LIMIT Displays Menu LF1, which shows all points where the currentFREQUENCIES s-parameter equals the limit values.LIMITS Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the active channelENABLED on your Group Delay display.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. The menuTO SELECT remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or untilOR TURN ON/OFF the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION__________________________________________________________________________SET LIMITSLINEAR MAG-LIMIT 1 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 1 line on or off for the active channel. For your con-XXX.XXX dB venience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow you to delineate a go/no go line on your Linear Mag display beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.LIMIT 2 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 2 line on or off for the active channel on your Linear Mag display.XXX.XXX dBREADOUT LIMIT Displays Menu LF1, which shows all points where the currentFREQUENCIES s-parameter equals the limit values.LIMITS Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the active channelENABLED on your Linear Mag display.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. The menuTO SELECT remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or untilOR TURN ON/OFF the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION__________________________________________________________________________SET LIMITSLINEAR MAG-LIMIT 1 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 1 line on or off for the active channel. For your con-XXX.XXX dB venience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow you to delineate a go/no go line on your Linear Mag display beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.LIMIT 2 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 2 line on or off for the active channel on your Linear Mag display.XXX.XXX dBREADOUT LIMIT Displays Menu LF1, which shows all points where the currentFREQUENCY s-arameter equals the limit values.PHASE-LIMIT ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 1 line on or off for the active channel. For your con-XXX.XXX dB venience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow you to delineate a go/no go line on your Phase display beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.LIMIT 2 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 2 line on or off for the active channel on your Phase display.XXX.XXX dBREADOUT LIMIT Displays Menu LF1, which shows all points where the currentFREQUENCIES s-parameter equals the limit values.LIMITS Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the active channelENABLED on your Phase display.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. The menuTO SELECT remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or untilOR TURN ON/OFF the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION__________________________________________________________________________SET LIMITSREAL-LIMIT 1 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 1 line on or off for the active channel. For your con-XXX.XXX pU venience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow you to delineate a go/no go line on your Real values display beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.LIMIT 2 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 2 line on or off for the active channel on your Real values display.XXX.XXX pULIMITS Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the active channelENABLED on your Real values display.PRESS<ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. The menuTO SELECT remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or untilOR TURN ON/OFF the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION__________________________________________________________________________SET LIMITSIMAGINARY-LIMIT 1 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 1 line on or off for the active channel. For your con-XXX.XXX mU venience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow you to delineate a go/no go line on your Imaginary values display beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.LIMIT 2 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 2 line on or off for the active channel on your Imaginary values display.XXX.XXX mULIMITS Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the active channelENABLED on your Imaginary values display.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. The menuTO SELECT remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or untilOR TURN ON/OFF the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.__________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION__________________________________________________________________________SET LIMITSREAL-LIMIT 1 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 1 line on or off for the active channel. For your con-XXX.XXX mU venience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow you to delineate a go/no go line on your Real values display beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.LIMIT 2 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 2 line on or off for the active channel on your Real values display.XXX.XXX mUIMAGINARY-LIMIT 1 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 1 line on or off for the active channel. For your con-XXX.XXX pU venience, the arbitrarily set limit lines allow you to delineate a go/no go line on your Imaginiary values display beyond which the measured values are unacceptable.LIMIT 2 ON (OFF) Turns the Limit 2 line on or off for the active channel on your Imaginiary values display.XXX.XXX pULIMITS Enables both previously set limit lines to appear for the active channelENABLED on your Imaginary values display.PRESS Pressing the ENTER key implements your menu selection. The menuTO SELECT remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or untilOR TURN ON/OFF the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.__________________________________________________________________________
TABLE 3-3__________________________________________________________________________Error Codes and Status MessagesCODE MESSAGE TEXT FATAL MEANING__________________________________________________________________________ Self Test, Main Microprocessor #2000 FIFO RESET FAILURE X FiFO failed to reset, PCB A12002 PROM CHECKSUM FAILURE #2 X Prom failure, PCB A12003 BATTERY BACKED RAM FAILURE X Non volitile RAM failure, PCB A12004 EXTENDED MEMORY FAILURE X Failure in the extended memory, PCB A12005 DYNAMIC RAM FAILURE #2 X Dynamic RAM failure, PCB A12006 TIMER FAILURE #2 X Programmable timer failure, PCB A12007 INTERRUPT CONTROLLER FAILURE #2 X Interrupt comtroller failure PCB, A12008 NUMERIC PROCESSOR FAILURE #2 X Numeric processor failure, PCB A12009 FRONT PANEL INTERFACE FAILURE X Interface failure, front panel, PCB A12010 PRINTER INTERFACE FAILURE X Printer or interface failure PCB A12 Self Test, Main Microprocessor #1020 FIFO TO # 2 FAILED RESET X Interface failure with FIFO, PCB A12022 FIFO TO I/O FAILED RESET Interface failure with FIFO PCB A13023 PROM CHECKSUM FAILURE #1 X Checksum error, PROM PCB A13024 DYNAMIC RAM FAILURE #1 X Dynamic RAM failure, PCB A13025 TIMER FAILURE #1 X Programmable timer failure PCB A13026 INTERRUPT CONTROLLOER FAILURE #1 X Interrupt controller failure PCB A13027 DISK DRIVE CONTROLLER FAILURE Disk drive controller failure, PCB A13028 DISK DRIVE FAILURE Disk drive SEEK failure, PCB A13029 NUMERIC PROCESSOR FAILURE #1 X 8087 math coprocessor failure030 PROM CARTRIDGEE CHECKSUM ERROR PROM cartridge failure PCB A13031 DISK DRIVE NOT READY FOR TEST Diskette is not in disk drive Self Test, I/O Processor040 PROM CHECKSUM FAILURE I/O X PROM failure, PCB A11041 RAM FAILURE I/O X RAM failure, PCB A11042 TIMER/INTERRUPT LOOPBACK FAILURE X Programmable timer failure, PCB A11043 GPIB INTERFACE FAILURE I/O GPIB failure, PCB A11044 FIFO FAILURE I/O X FIFO failure, PCB A11050 A1 COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE LO 1 Phase Lock PCB Error051 A2 COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE LO 2 Phase Lock PCB Failure052 A3 COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE Cal/Third Local O scillator PCB Failure053 A4 COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE Analog to digital PCB failure054 A5 COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE 10 Mhz References PCB failure055 A6 COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE Source lock PCB failure056 A10 COMMUNICATIONS FAILURE Bandswitch blank/sync PCB057 8 BIT A/D CONVERTER FAILURE Failure A/D PCB A4058 STEERING DAC FAILURE Failure A/D PCB A4059 12 BIT A/D OR STEERING DAC FAILURE Failure A/D PCB A4060 TEST SET NOT CONNECTED OR NOT General failure of test set WORKING061 TEST SET CHAN A CAL PHASING FAILURE Test set CHAN A failure062 TEST SET CHAN A CAL LEVEL FAILURE Test set CHAN A failure063 TEST SET CHAN A GAIN FAILURE Test set CHAN A failure064 TEST SET CHAN A PHASE RANGING FAILURE Test set CHAN A failure065 TEST SET CHAN B CAL PHASING FAILURE Test set CHAN B failure067 TEST SET CHAN B GAIN FAILURE Test set CHAN B failure068 TEST SET CHAN B PHASE RANGING FAILURE Test set CHAN B failure069 TEST SET REF CHAN CAL PHASING FAILURE Test set REF CHAN failure070 TEST SET REF CHAN CAL LEVEL FAILURE Test set REF CHAN failure071 TEST SET REF CHAN GAIN FAILURE Test set REF CHAN failure072 TEST SET REF CHAN PHASE RANGING Test set REF CHAN failure System Status, Program Load100 DISK DRIVE NOT READY X Program failed to load from disk, (disk installed?)101 PROGRAM DATA ERROR X Program failed to load from disk102 PROGRAM FILE MISSING Loader could not find system files103 DISK ERROR The 360 is unable to read the diskette104 UNKNOWN DISK ERROR Loader failed a consistency check105 PROGRAM DATA ERROR ON # 2 Program for processor #2 failed to load Program Initialization110 SOURCE ID FAILURE No sweeper ID on GPIB; sweeper may not be connected.111 TEST SET NOT CONNECTED X Initialization detects a descrepancy.112 TEST SET FREQ. RANGE X Initialization detects a descrepancy. DOES NOT MATCH SOURCE113 CAL DATA NOT FOUND: CHANGE File not found on disk with name matching DISK AND PRESS <ENTER> that in battery backed RAM.114 PROGRAM ERROR X Program corrupted.115 PROCESSOR COM ERROR X FIFO Synch problem Disk Releated. Program Initialization, Disk Related131 DISK READ ERROR Hard error reading from disk.132 DISK WRITE ERROR Hard error writing to disk.133 FILE DELETION ERROR Write protect tab is in "read only" position.134 DISK NOT READY Disk not in unit or not formatted135 DISK WRITE PROTECTED Write protect tab is in "read only" position.136 OUT OF DISK SPACE Disk file space full137 FILE IS INCOMPATIBLE File is not a 360 data or program file.138 NO SPACE FOR NEW DATA FILE Disk file space full.139 FILE MARKED READ ONLY Read-only attribute set on file.140 NO FILES REMAIN TO OVERWRITE All files of the type have been deleted.141 NO FILES REMAIN TO DELETE All files of the type have been deleted. Program Initialization, Peripheral170 PRINTER NOT READY Printer "off line" or not connected.171 PLOTTER NOT READY Plotter "off line" or not connected. Control Panel200 SELECTED FREQUENCY OUT OF CAL RANGE Cal. range does not include selected frequency.201 MARKERS SELECTED FOR READOUT NOT Sweep range does not include selected frequency ACTIVE IN SWEEP RANGE208 OUT OF RANGE Attempted to enter an out-of-range parameter.209 START GREATER THAT STOP Attempted to a set start frequency that was greater than the stop frequency.210 OUT OF RANGE.20 PERCENT MAX Attempted to enter a smoothing or group delay factor that was greater than 20%.213 OUT OF H/W RANGE Attempted to enter a frequency that is outside of the system hardware range.216 TOO MANY POINTS. Attempted to set too many discrete 501 MAXIMUM frequency points.217 TOO FEW POINTS. Attempted to set too few discrete frequency points. 2 MINIMUM219 DISCRETE FREQS LOST Setup changed in N-discrete frequency mode.220 OUT OF SWEEP RANGE Attempt to set marker outside sweep range.221 OPTION NOT INSTALLED The selected option is not installed222 MEAS. DATA NOT AVAILABLE No measured data on channel to be stored. FOR STORAGE223 NO STORED MEMORY DATA No data available in memory for channel.224 SYSTEM BUS ADDRESSES Attempt to set GPIB addresses to same value. MUST BE UNIQUE225 SYSTEM UNCALIBRATED no cal exists.226 MEMORY LOCATION Saved state data is invalid. CORRUPTED227 SETUP INCONSISTENT Saved state not compatible with hardware or RECALL ABORTED software version228 WINDOW TOO SMALL Attempt to set start greater than or equal to stop.229 OUT OF WINDOW RANGE Attempt to set marker outside start to stop range.230 ATTENUATOR UNAVAILABLE Selected attenuators not available in test set231 START MUST BE LESS THAN Attempt to set start greater than or equal to stop STOP in marker sweep232 ILLEGAL IN C.W. MODE Attempt to readout limit frequency.233 ILLEGAL IN TIME DOMAIN Attempt to readout limit frequency.234 BOTH LIMITS MUST BE ON Attempt to readout limit frequency.235 Stop is Over Range Discrete fill parameters cause stop to go over hardware range238 Out of Ramge 10% Minimum Attempt to set pen speed to below 10%270 UNCALIBRATED Channel has S parameter for which calibration does not exist.271 PRINTER NOT READY Printer not connected or paper out.272 TOO MUCH PRINT DATA Print buffer is full. Reduce number of channels or data points.273 PLOTTER NOT READY Plotter not connected.280 CAL INVALID Calibration is incorrect for S parameter displayed.281 TIME DOMAIN INVALID Time domain cannot be used in current setup282 GROUP DELAY INVALID Group delay cannot be used in current setup283 GATE MUST BE ON Attempt to select Frequency With Time Gate with gate off.284 SMOOTHING INVALID Attempt to use smoothing while in C.W. mode.285 MEMORY DATA INVALID Setup has changed since data was stored. Measurement Related300 LOW IF Insufficient signal level detected: Device under test may not be connected.301 LOCK FAILURE RF source failed to lock to reference oscillator in 360 testset.302 A/D FAILURE Analog to Digital convertor not functioning in 360 mainframe.303 RF OVERLOAD Test signal level is too high: reduce source level or add attenuation.310 SWPR ID FAILURE Communications lost with RF source.311 SWPR SELF TEST FAILURE RF source failed power on self-test program.312 NO TEST SET Test set not connected. Reconnect and cycle power to clear GPIB Related400 GPIB ERROR Data transmission error on__________________________________________________________________________ GPIB ##STR3##
______________________________________MENU TD1 DESCRIPTION______________________________________DOMAINFREQUENCY Displays the data in normal frequency domain format.FREQUENCY Displays the data in the frequency domainWITH TIME after a specific time range has beenGATE sampled by the gate function.TIME Displays the data in the time (distance)LOWPASS MODE domain, using true lowpass processing. Data must be taken using a harmonic series calibration and sweep in order to use this mode.TIME Displays the data in the time (distance)BANDPASS MODE domain using bandpass processing. Any data sweep range using normal calibration can be used.DISPLAYTIME/DISTANCE Switches the mode of display between time and distance. This does not affect the actual displayed data, but only the annotation.SET RANGE Takes you to Menu TD2, which lets you set range and other display parameters.SET GATE Takes you to menu TD4, which lets you set gate parameters.GATE ON/OFF Switches the gate on or off each time ENTER is pressed.HELP Displays an informational help menu.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remainsOR SWITCH on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU TD2tl DESCRIPTION______________________________________LOWPASS TIMEDOMAIN SETUPSTART Sets the start time of the display.XXX.XXX psSTOP Sets the stop time of the display.XXX.XXX psCENTER Sets the center time of the display.XXX.XXX psSPAN Sets the span (Stop - Start) of the display.XXX.XXX psMARKER RANGE Takes you to Menu TD7d/71, which lets you set the display to a range determined by two of the markers.RESPONSE Switches between Impulse and StepIMPULSE/STEP response each time ENTER is pressed.MORE Takes you to Menu TD3, which contains additional selections for display steup.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU TD2dl DESCRIPTION______________________________________LOWPASSDISTANCEDISPLAY SETUPSTART Sets the start time of the display.XXX.XXX mmSTOP Sets the stop time of the display.XXX.XXX mmCENTER Sets the center time of the display.XXX.XXX mmSPAN Sets the span (Stop - Start) of the display.XXX.XXX mmMARKER RANGE Takes you to Menu TD7d/7l, which lets you set the display to a range determined by two of the markers.RESPONSE Switches between Impulse and StepIMPUSLE/STEP response each time ENTER is pressed.MORE Takes you to Menu TD3, which contains additional selections for display setup.REL. VELOCITY Indicates the relative velocity of light,X.X as set by the dielectric constant in menu RD2.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU TD2tb DESCRIPTION______________________________________BANDPASS TIMEDOMAIN SETUPSTART Sets the start time of the display.XXX.XXX psSTOP Sets the stop time of the display.XXX.XXX psCENTER Sets the center time of the display.XXX.XXX psSPAN Sets the span (Stop - Start) of the display.XXX.XXX psMARKER RANGE Takes you to Menu TD7d/7l, which lets you set the display to a range determined by two of the markers.PHASOR ON/OFF Switches Phasor Impulse processing onIMPULSE or off each time ENTER is pressed.SET RANGE TOISOLATE ONEDISCONTINUITYMORE Takes you to Meun TD3, which contains additional selections for display setup.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU TD2db DESCRIPTION______________________________________BANDPASSDISTANCEDISPLAY SETUPSTART Sets the start time of the display.XXX.XXX mmSTOP Sets the stop time of the display.XXX.XXX mmCENTER Sets the center time of the display.XXX.XXX mmSPAN Sets the span (Stop - Start) of the display.XXX.XXX mmMARKER RANGE Takes you to Menu TD7d/7l, which lets you set the display to a range determined by two of the markers.PHASOR ON/OFF Switches Phasor Impulse processing onIMPULSE or off each time ENTER is pressed.SET RANGE TOISOLATE ONEDISCONTINUITYMORE Takes you to Menu TD3, which contains additional selections for display setup.REL. VELOCITY Indicates the relative velocity of light,X.X as set by the dielectric constant in menu RD2.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________BANDPASS TIMEDOMAIN SETUPWINDOW Takes you to Menu TD5, which lets youNOMINAL change the window type.SET GATE Takes you to menu TD4, which lets you set the gate.PREVIOUS MENU Returns you to Menu TD2.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remainsOR TURN ON/OFF on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________LOWPASS TIMEDOMAIN SETUPWINDOW Takes you to Menu TD5, which lets youNOMINAL change the window type.SET GATE Takes you to menu TD4, which lets you set the gate.SET D.C. TERM Takes you to Menu TD6, which lets youXXX.XXX set the D.C. term for lowpass processing.PREVIOUS MENU Returns you to Menu TD2PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________GATESTART Sets the start time of the gate.XXX.XXX mmSTOP Sets the stop time of the gate.XXX.XXX mmCENTER Sets the center time of the gate.XXX.XXX mmSPAN Sets the span (Stop - Start) of the gate.XXX.XXX mmSHAPE Takes you to Menu TD5, which lets youNOMINAL set the shape of the gate.GATE ON Switches the gate on or off each time ENTER is pressed.PREVIOUS MENU Returns you to the previous menu.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________GATESTART Sets the start time of the gate.XXX.XXX nsSTOP Sets the stop time of the gate.XXX.XXX nsCENTER Sets the center time of the gate.XXX.XXX nsSPAN Sets the span (Stop - Start) of the gate.XXX.XXX nsSHAPE Takes you to Menu TD5, which lets youNOMINAL set the shape of the gate.GATE ON Switches the gate on or off each time ENTER is pressed.PREVIOUS MENU Returns you to the previous menu.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO SELECT your menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SHAPERECTANGULAR Selects a Rectangular (one-term) shape.NOMINAL Selects a two-term Hamming shape.LOW SIDELOBE Selects a three-term Blackman-Harris shape.MIN SIDELOBE Selects a four-term Blackman-Harris shape.HELP Displays an informational help menu.PRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements yourTO SELECT menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________SET DC TERM Since it is impossible to measure the trueFOR LOW PASS D.C. term required for lowpass processing,PROCESSING a value must be estimated. This menu allows a choice between five different selections for this value.AUTO Sets the D.C. term to a value determined byEXTRAPOLATE extrapolating the data points near the zero frequency.LINE Sets the D.C. term to the characteristicIMPEDANCE impedance of the transmission medium (Z.sub.0).OPEN Sets the D.C. term to correspond to an open circuit.SHORT Sets the D.C. term to correspond to a short circuit.OTHER Sets the D.C. term to the value entered.XXX.XXX#ABOVE VALUEREPRESENTS AREFLECTIONCOEFF. CFXX.XXX mUPRESS <ENTER> Pressing the ENTER key implements yourTO SELECT menu selection. The menu remains on the screen until another menu is selected for display or until the CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.______________________________________
______________________________________MENU DESCRIPTION______________________________________TIMEMARKER RANGESTART TIME Sets the start time to the value of theMARKER ( ) selected marker.XXX.XXX nSSTOP TIME Sets the stop time to the value of theMARKER ( ) selected marker.XXX.XXX nSRESTORE Returns the display to the original timeORIGINAL range that was in effect before the markerRANGE range was selected.PREVIOUS MENU Returns you to the TD2 menu.USE KEYPAD Pressing the ENTER key implementsTO CHOOSE your menu selection. The menu remainsMARKER (1-6) on the screen until another menu isOR selected for display or until thePRESS <ENTER> CLEAR/RET LOC key is pressed.TO SELECT______________________________________
TABLE 4-2__________________________________________________________________________Command Code ClassesCommand Code Description Para. Table Page__________________________________________________________________________Channels DSP, D13, D24, D14, CH1, CH2, CH3, CH4 4-4.4 4-4 4-16Data entry 0 thru 9, -,.,GHZ, MHZ, KHZ, PSC, NSC, USC, 4-4.5 4-5 4-16 DBM, DEG, MMT, CMT, MTR, XX1, XX3, XM3, REU, IMUMeasurement Control S11, S21, S22, S12, SRT, STP, PWR, CWF, FHI, 4-4.6 4-6 4-17 FLO, HLD, TRS, CTN, WFS, SA1, SA2, TA2, SWPDisplay Control MAG, PHA, MPH, SWR, SMI, ISM, SME, ISE, SMC, 4-4.7 4-7 4-19 DLA, PLR, PLG, LIN, LPH, REL, IMG, RIM, SCL, OFF, REF, ASC, APREnhancement IFN, IFR, IFM, AVG, AOF, SON, SOF 4-4.8 4-8 4-22Reference Delay RDD, RDT, RDA, DIA, DIT, DIP, DIM, DIE 4-4.9 4-9 4-22Trace Memory DAT, MEM, DTM, DNM, MIN, DIV, ADD, MUL, STD, 4-4.10 4-10 4-23 SDK, RCKMarkers MK1-MK6, MOF, MON, MO1-MO6, DR1-DR6, DRO, 4-4.11 4-11 4-25 DRF, MR1-MR6, MMN, MMX, M1S-M6S, M1E-M6E, M1C-M6CLimits LUP, LLO, LON, LOF, LFR, LFD, LFP 4-4.12 4-12 4-26Hard copy output TDD, PFS, PGR, PMK, PTB, PMT, PT0-PT9, PST, 4-4.13 4-13 4-28 PLS, PLD, PLT, PMN, PLH, PGT, PFL, PTL, PTR, PBL, PBR, DPN, GPN, MPN, HPN, LDT, LNM, LMS, LID, TDD, RTB, SPDMiscellaneous RST, FON, FOF, BC0, BC1, BLU, CYN, TST, RTL, 4-4.14 4-14 4-30Functions DGS, DCP, DC1, DC3Calibration C12, C8T, CRF, CFR, CFT, CRL, NOC, SRT, STP, 5-5.1 * * FRS, FRI, FRP, FIL, DFQ, DFD, CWC, CWF, TDC, P1C, P2C, CMS, CFS, CMK, CFK, CMN, CFN, CM3, CF3, CNG, CND, COO, COS, CC0, CC1, CC2, CC3, BBL, SLD, BEG, TCD, NCS, KEC, CON, COF, A12, A8T, ARF, AFR, AFT, ARLSave/Recall STO, RLD, SV1-SV4, RC1-RC4 5-5.2 * *Data Transfer OM1-OM6, OAP, OKP, OID, ONP, FMA, FMB, FMC, 5-5.3 * * MSB, OCl-OC9, OCA, OCB, OCC, OCL OCD, IC1-IC9 ICA, ICB, ICC, ICL, IFV, OS1-OS4, OFP, IS1-IS4, IFP, ODR, ORD, OFD, ICD, IFDGroup Execute Trigger DEF, END 5-5.4 * *Disk Functions SDK, RCK, STO, RLD, TDD, RTB, DEC, DEN, INT, 5-5.5 * * LKTTime Domain FQD, DBP, TBP, DPI, TPI, DLP, TLP, DCA, DCZ, 5-5.6 * * DCS, DCV, MRR, LPI, LPS, FGT, GON, GOF, GDS, SRT, STP, GST, GSP, GCT, GSN, GRT, GNM, GLS, GMS, WRT, WNM, WLS, WMSStatus bytes/SRQ LPI, LPS, OPB, OEB, IPM, IEM, SQ0, SQ1, CSB 5-5.7 * *__________________________________________________________________________ *Denotes material to be included in Section V of the followon packet
TABLE 4-3__________________________________________________________________________An Alphabetical List of Command CodesCommand Code Description Para. Table Page__________________________________________________________________________ADD Select Complex Addition as Trace Math 4-4.10 4-10 4-23AFR Assume Frequency Response * * *AFT Assumme Frequency Response - Transmission Only * * *AOF Averaging Off 4-4.8 4-8 4-22APR Set Group Delay Aperature Percentage * * *ARF Assume Reflection Only - One Port * * *ARL Assume Frequency Response - Reflecton Only * * *ASC Autoscale Display 4-4.7 4-7 4-19AVG (value) Averaging On and Set to Value 4-4.8 4-8 4-22A8T Assume 8 Term * * *A12 Assume 12 Term * * *BBL Broadband Load * * *BC0 Blank CRT 4-4.14 4-14 4-30BC1 Unblank CRT 4-4.14 4-14 4-30BEG Begin Calibration * * *BLU Select Blue Color 4-4.14 4-14 4-30C12 Calibrate Full 12 Term * * *C8T Calibrate 8 Term - One Path Two Port) * * *CC0-CC3 (value) Capacitance For Open Device * * *CFK Female K Connector .TM. for the Specified Port * * *CFN Female Type N Connector for the Specified Port * * *CFS Female SMA Connector for the Specified Port * * *CFR Calibrate Frequency Response * * *CFT Calibrate Frequency Response - Transmission Only * * *CH1-CH4 Select Active Channel 1 Through 4 4-4.4 4-4 4-16CMK Male K Connector For The Specified Port * * *CMN Male Type N Connector For The Specified Port * * *CMS Male SMA Connector For The Specified Port * * *CMT Centimeter 4-4.5 4-5 4-16CM3 Male GPC-3.5 Connector for the Specified Port * * *CF3 Female GPC-3.5 Connector for the Specified Port * * *CND Connector Type Other * * *CNG Connector Type GPC-7 * * *CNO (value) Connector Offset Value For "OTHER" connector * * *CCF Correction Off * * *CON Apply Cal Correction * * *COO (value) Connector Offset for Open Device * * *COS (value) Connector Offset for Short Device * * *CRF Calibrate Reflection Only - One Port * * *CRL Calibrate Frequency Response - Reflecion Only * * *CSB Clear Both Status Bytes * * *CTN Continue Sweeping From Hold 4-4.6 4-6 4-17CWC CW Cal * * *CWF (value) CW Frequency 4-4.6 4-6 4-17CYN Select Cyan Color 4-4.14 4-14 4-30D13 Dual Channel 1 and 3 Display 4-4.4 4-4 4-16D14 Four Channel Display 1 Through 4 4-4.4 4-4 4-16D24 Dual Channel 2 and 4 Display 4-4.4 4-4 4-16DAT Display Data 4-4.10 4-10 4-23DBL dB 4-4.5 4-5 4-16DBM dBm 4-4.5 4-5 4-16DBP Distance Bandpass Mode * * *DC1 Display Channels 1 and 2 Operating Parameters 4-4.14 4-14 4-30DC3 Display Channels 3 and 4 Operating Parameters 4-4.14 4-14 4-30DCA DC Term For Low Pass, Auto * * *DCO DC Term For Low Pass, Open * * *DCP Display Calibration Parameters * * *DCS DC Term For Low Pass, Short * * *DCV (value) Set DC Term for Low Pass To Value Specified * * *DCZ DC Term for Lowpass, Line Impedance * * *DEC (filename) Delete Cal File * * *DED (filename) Delete Data File * * *DEF Begin Definition of GET Action * * *DEG Degree 4-4.5 4-5 4-16DEN (filename) Delete Norm File * * *DFC Discrete Frequency Cal * * *DFD Discrete Frequencies Done * * *DFP Display Global Operating Parameters 4-4.14 4-14 4-30DFQ (value) Discrete Frequencies * * *DGS Display GPIB Status 4-4.14 4-14 4-30DIA Set Dielectric Constant to 1.0 for Air 4-4.9 4-9 4-22DIE (value) Enter Dielectric Constant 4-4.9 4-9 4-22DIM Set Dielectric Constant to 1.69 for Microporous 4-4.9n 4-9 4-22DIP Set Dielectric Constant to 2.26 for Polyethylene 4-4.9 4-9 4-22DIT Set Dielectric Constant to 2.1 for Teflon 4-4.9 4-9 4-22DIV Set Complex Division as Trace Math 4- 4.10 4-10 4-23DLA Group Delay Display Format 4-4.7 4-7 4-19DLP Distance Lowpass Mode * * *DNM Display Data Normalized to Memory 4-4.10 4-10 4-23DPI Distance Phasor Impulse Mode * * *DPN (value) Data Pen Number 4-4.13 4-13 4-28DR1-DR6 Select Delta Reference Marker 4-4.11 4-11 4-25DRF Delta Reference Mode On 4-4.11 4-11 4-25DRO Delta Reference Mode Off 4-4.11 4-11 4-25DSP Single Channel Display 4-4.4 4-4 4-16DTM Display Data and Memory 4-4.10 4-10 4-23END End Definition of GET Action * * *FFD Form Feed Sent to Printer * * *FGT Frequency With Time Gate * * *FHI Frequency Resolution High 4-4.6 4-6 4-17FIL Fill Range * * *FLO Frequency Resolution Low 4-4.6 4-6 4-17FMA ASCII Format Data Transfer * * *FMB Floating Point Format 64 Bit Data Transfer * * *FMC Floating Point Format 32 Bit Data Transfer * * *FME Frequency Resolution Medium 4-4.6 4-6 4-17FOF Blank All Frequency Information 4-4.14 4-14 4-30FON Display All Frequency Information 4-4.14 4-14 4-30FQD Frequency Domain * * *FRI (value) Fill Range Increment * * *FRP (value) Fill Range Points * * *FRS (value) Fill Range Start * * *GCT (value) Gate Center, Value in Time or Distance * * *GDS Gate Symbol Displayed * * *GHZ Gigahertz 4-4.5 4-5 4-16GLS Gate Shape Low Sidelobe * * *GMS Gate Shape Minimum Sidelobe * * *GNM Gate Shape Nominal * * *GOF Gate Off * * *GON Gate On * * *GPN (value) Graticule Pen Number 4-4.13 4-13 4-28GRT Gate Shape Rectangular * * *GSN (value) Gate Span, Value in Time or Distance * * *GSP (value) Gate Stop, Value in Time or Distance * * *GST (value) Gate Start, Value in Time or Distance * * *HLD Hold Mode 4-4.6 4-6 4-17HPN (value) Header Pen Number 4-4.13 4-13 4-28IC1-IC9 Load Cal Coefficients 1 Through 9 * * *ICA-ICC Load Cal Coefficients 10 Through 12 * * *ICD Load Corrected Data * * *ICL Input 12 Calibration Coefficients in String Format * * *IEM Input Extended Status Byte Mask * * *IFN Set IF Bandwith to Normal 4-4.8 4-8 4-22IFR Set IF Bandwith to Reduced 4-4.8 4-8 4-22IFM Set IF Bandwith to Minimum 4-4.8 4-8 4-22IFD Load Final Data * * *IFV Input List Of Frequencies * * *IMG Imaginary Display Format 4-4.7 4-7 4-16IMU Imaginary Units 4-4.5 4-5 4-16INT Initalize Data Disk * * *IPM Input Primary Status Byte Mask * * *ISC Select Inverted Compressed Smith Chart for Active 4-4-7el 4-7 4-16ISE (value) Expand Inverted Smith Chart (10, 20, or 30 dB) 4-4.7 4-7 4-16ISM Inverted Smith Chart 4-4.7 4-7 4-16KEC Keep Existing Cal * * *KHZ Kilohertz 4-4.5 4- 5 4-16LDT (string) Label Date 4-4.13 4-13 4-28LFD (value) Set Limit Delta for Limit Frequency Readout on 4-4.12 4-12 4-26 ChannelLFP Select Phase Limit Readout for Active Channel 4-4.12 4-12 4-26LFR Select Limit Frequency Readout for Active Channel 4-4.12 4-12 4-26LIN Linear Magnitude Display Format 4-4.7 4-7 4-19LID (string) Label Device ID 4-4.13 4-13 4-28LLO (value) Set Lower Limit 4-4.12 4-12 4-26LMS (string) Label Model and Serial Number 4-4.12 4-12 4-26LNM (string) Label Operator's Name 4-4.12 4-12 4-26LOF Disable Limits 4-4.12 4-12 4-28LON Enable Limits 4-4.12 4-12 4-28LPH Linear Magnitude and Phase Display Format 4-4.7 4-7 4-19LPI Lowpass Impulse * * *LPS Lowpass Step * * *LSB Least Significant Byte First Data Transfer Mode * * *LUP (value) Set Upper Limit 4-4.12 4-12 4-28MAG Log Magnitude Display Format 4-4.7 4-7 4-19MEM Display Memory 4-4.10 4-10 4-23MHZ Megahertz 4-4.5 4-5 4-16MIN Select Complex Subtraction as Trace Math 4-4.10 4-10 4-23MK1-MK6 (value) Set Marker To Value 4-4.11 4-11 4-25MMN Marker To Min 4-4.11 4-11 4-25MMT Millimeter 4-4.11 4-11 4-25MMX Marker To Max 4-4.11 4-11 4-25MO1-MO6 Markers Off 4-4.11 4-11 4-25M1C-M6C Marker Sweep CW Frequency 4-4.11 4-11 4-25M1E-M6E Marker Sweep End Frequency 4-4.11 4-11 4-25M1S-M6S Marker Sweep Start Frequency 4-4.11 4-11 4-25MON Markers Enabled 4-4.11 4-11 4-25MPH Log Magnitude and Phase Display Format 4-4.7 4-7 4-19MPN (value) Marker Pen Number 4-4.13 4-13 4-28MR1-MR6 Marker Selected for Readout and Data Output 4-4.11 4-11 4-25MRR Marker Range Restore * * *MSB Most Signifigant Byte First Data Transfer Mode * * *MTR Meter 4-4.5 4-5 4-16MUL Select Complex Multiplication as Trace Math 4-4.10 4-10 4-23NCS Next Cal Step * * *NOC Normal Cal * * *NSC Nanosecond 4-4.5 4-5 4-16OAP Output Active Parameter * * *OC1-OC9 Output Cal Coefficients 1 Through 9 * * *OCA-OCC Output Cal Coefficients 10 Through 12 * * *OCD Output Corrected Data * * *OCL Output All 12 Cal Coefficients in String Format * * *ODR Output Disk Directory * * *OEB Output Extended Status Byte * * *OFD Output Final Data * * *OFF (value) Set Offset Value 4-4.7 4-7 4-19OFP Output Front Panel Setup in String Format * * *OFV Output Frequency Values * * *OID Output Identify * * *OKP Output Front Panel Key Pressed * * *OM1-OM6 Output Marker Value 1 Through 6 * * *ONP Output Number Of Data Points * * *OPB Output Primary Status Byte * * *ORD Output Raw Data * * *OS1-OS4 Output Stored Setup In String Format * * *P1C Port 1 Connector Specification * * *P2C Port 2 Connector Specification * * *PBL Plot Bottom Left, 1/4 Screen 4-4.13 4-13 4-28PBR Plot Bottom Right, 1/4 Screen 4-4.13 4-13 4-28PFS Print Full Screen 4-4.13 4-13 4-28PGR Print Graph 4-4.13 4-13 4-28PGT Plot Graticule 4-4.13 4-13 4-28PHA Phase Display Format 4-4.7 4-7 4-19PLD Plot Data Area Only 4-4.13 4-13 4-28PFL Full Size Plot 4-4.13 4-13 4-26PLG Polar Log Display Format 4-4.7 4-7 4-19PLH Plot Header 4-4.13 4-13 4-28PLM Plot Markers and Limits 4-4.13 4-13 4-28PLR Polar Linear Display Format 4-4.7 4-7 4-19PLS Plot Entire Screen 4-4.13 4-13 4-28PLT Plot Trace(s) 4-4.13 4-13 4-28PMK Print Marker Data Only 4-4.13 4-13 4-28PMN Plot Menu 4-4.13 4-13 4-28PMT Print Marker And Tabular Data 4-4.13 4-13 4-28PSC Picosecond 4-4.5 4-5 4-16PST Stop Print /Plot 4-4.13 4-13 4-28PT0-PT9 Set Print Tabular Data Density 4-4.13 4-13 4-28PTB Print Tabular Data Only 4-4.13 4-13 4-28PTL Plot Top left, 1/4 Size 4-4.13 4-13 4-28PTR Plot Top Right, 1/4 Size 4-4.13 4-13 4-28PWR (value) Set Power Level 4-4.6 4-6 4-17RC1-RC4 Recall Front Panel Setup From Internal Memory 4-4.10 4-10 4-23 Numbers 1 Through 4RCK (filename) Recall Normalization Data From Disk 4-4.9 4-9 4-22RDA Autoadjust Reference Delay 4-4.9 4-9 4-22RDD (value) Reference Delay (Value in Distance) 4-4.9 4-9 4-22RDT (value) Reference Delay (Value in Time) 4-4.9 4-9 4-22REF Set Reference Line of Display on Active Channel 4-4.7 4-7 4-19REL Real Display Format 4-4.7 4-7 4-19REU Real Units 4-4.5 4-5 4-16RIM Real and Imaginary Display Format 4-4.7 4-7 4-19RLD (filename) Reload Cal Data And Front Panel Setup From Disk * * *RST Reset 360 To Default Parameters 4-4.14 4-14 4-30RTB (filename) Recall Tabular Data From Disk 4-4.13 4-13 4-28RTL Return to Local 4-4.14 4-14 4-30S11 Measure S.sub.11 On Active Channel 4-4.6 4-6 4-17S12 Measure S.sub.12 On Active Channel 4-4.6 4-6 4-17S21 Measure S.sub.21 On Active Channel 4-4.6 4-6 4-17S22 Measure S.sub.22 On Active Channel 4-4.6 4-6 4-17SA1 (value) Set Source Attenuator, Port 1 4-4.6 4-6 4-17SA2 (value) Set Source Attenuator, Port 2 4-4.6 4-6 4-17SCL (value) Set Resolution (scale) of Display 4-4.7 4-7 4-19SDK (filename) Store Data on Disk 4-4.10 4-10 4-23SLD Sliding Load * * *SMC (value) Compressed Smith Chart (dB) 4-4.7 4-7 4-19SME (value) Expanded Smith Chart (10, 20, or 30 dB) 4-4.7 4-7 4-19SMI Smith Chart 4-4.7 4-7 4-19SOF Smoothing Off 4-4.8 4-8 4-22SON (value) Smoothing On and Set to Value 4-4.8 4-8 4-22SPD (value) Set Plotter Pen Speed Percentage 4-4.13 4-13 4-28SQ0 Disable SRQ * * *SQ1 Enable SRQ * * *SRT (value) Start Frequency, Distance, Or Time Value 4-4.6 4-6 4-17STD Store Active Channel Data Trace to Memory 4-4.10 4-10 4-23STO (filename) Store Cal Data And Front Panel Setup On Disk * * *STP (value) Stop Frequency, Distance Or Time Value 4-4.6 4-10 4-23SV1-SV4 Save Front Panel Setup to Internal Memory * * * Numbers 1 Through 4SWP Select Continuous Sweep Mode 4-4.6 4-10 4-23SWR Select SWR Display Format 4-4.7 4-7 4-19TA2 (value) Set Test Attenuator, Port 2 4-4.6 4-6 4-17TBP Time Bandpass Mode * * *TCD Take Cal Data * * *TDC Time Domain (Harmonic) Cal * * *TDD (filename) Tabular Data to Disk 4-4.13 4-13 4-28TLP Time Lowpass Mode * * *TPI Time Phasor Impulse Mode * * *TRS Trigger/Restart Sweep 4-4.6 4-6 4-17TST Self Test 4-4.14 4-14 4-30USC Microsecond 4-4.5 4-5 4-16WFS Wait Full Sweep 4-4.6 4-6 4-17WLS Window Shape Low Sidelobe * * *WMS Window Shape Min Sidelobe * * *WNM Window Shape Nominal * * *WRT Window Shape Rectangular * * *XM3 Unitless Terminator .times. 10.sup.-3 4-4.5 4-5 4-16XX1 Unitless Terminator 4-4.5 4-5 4-16XX3 Unitless Terminator .times. 10.sup.3 4-4.5 4-5 4-16__________________________________________________________________________
TABLE 4-4______________________________________Channel Control Command CodesCOMMANDCODE DESCRIPTION______________________________________DSP Single Channel Display of Active ChannelD13 Dual Channel Display, Channels 1 and 3D24 Dual Channel Display, Channels 2 and 4D14 Quad Display, All Four ChannelsCH1 Channel 1 Selected As Active ChannelCH2 Channel 2 Selected As Active ChannelCH3 Channel 3 Selected As Active ChannelCH4 Channel 4 Selected As Active Channel______________________________________
TABLE 4-5______________________________________Data Entry Command CodesCOMMANDCODE DESCRIPTION______________________________________0,1,2,3,4,5, Numerals For Numeric Entry6,7,8,9- Minus Sign. Decimal PointGHZ Gigahertz Data TerminatorMHZ Megahertz Data TerminatorKHZ Kilohertz Data TerminatorPSC Picoseconds Data TerminatorNSC Nanoseconds Data TerminatorUSC Microseconds Data TerminatorDBL dB Log Data TerminatorDBM dBm Data TerminatorDEG Degrees Data TerminatorMMT Millimeter Data TerminatorCMT Centimeter Data TerminatorMTR Meter Data TerminatorXX1 Unitless Data Terminator, .times.1XX3 Unitless Data Terminator, .times.10.sup.-3XM3 Unitless Data Terminator, .times.10.sup.-3REU Real Units Data TerminatorIMU Imaginary Units Data Terminator______________________________________
TABLE 4-6__________________________________________________________________________Measurement Control Command CodesCOMMANDCODE DESCRIPTION VALUES TERMINATORS__________________________________________________________________________S11 Selects S.sub.11 as S-Parameter On Active Channel N/A N/AS21 Selects S.sub.21 as S-Parameter On Active Channel N/A N/AS22 Selects S.sub.22 as S-Parameter On Active Channel N/A N/AS12 Selects S.sub.12 as S-Parameter On Active Channel N/A N/ASRT Sets Start Frequency Depends On Frequency GHZ, MHZ, KHZ Range Of InstrumentSTP Sets Stop Frequency Depends On Frequency GHZ, MHZ, KHZ Range Of InstrumentCWF Sets CW Frequency Depends On Frequency GHZ, MHZ, KHZ Range Of InstrumentPWR Sets Source Power Depends On Power DBM, XX1, XX3, XM3 Range Of SourceFHI Sets Data Points To Maximum N/A N/AFME Sets Data Points To Normal N/A N/AFLO Sets Data Points To Minimum N/A N/ASA1 Sets Source Attenuator For Port 1 0 dB to 70 dB DBL, DBM, XX1, XX3, XM3SA2 Sets Source Attenuator For Port 2 0 dB to 70 dB DBL, DBM, XX1, XX3, XM3TA2 Sets Test Attenuator For Port 2 0 dB to 40 dB DBL, DBM, XX1, XX3, XM3HLD Holds Sweep At Current Point N/A N/ACTN Continue Sweep After Hold N/A N/ATRS Triggers or Restarts a Sweep N/A N/AWFS Wait full sweep N/A N/ASWP Selects Continuous Sweep Mode N/A N/A__________________________________________________________________________
TABLE 4-7__________________________________________________________________________Display Control Command CodesCOMMANDCODE DESCRIPTION VALUES TERMINATORS__________________________________________________________________________MAG Selects Log Magnitude Display for Active N/A N/A ChannelPHA Selects Phase Display for Active Channel N/A N/AMPH Selects Log Magnitude and Phase Display for N/A N/A Active ChannelSMI Selects Normal Smith Chart Display for Active N/A N/A ChannelSWR Selects SWR Display for Active Channel N/A N/AISM Selects Inverted Normal Smith Chart Display for N/A N/A Active ChannelDLA Selects Group Delay Display for Active Channel N/A N/APLR Selects Linear Polar Display for Active Channel N/A N/APLG Selects Log Polar Display for Active Channel N/A N/ALIN Selects Linear Magnitude Display for Active N/A N/A ChannelLPH Selects Linear Magnitude and Phase Display for N/A N/A Active ChannelREL Selects Real Display for Active Channel N/A N/AIMG Selects Imaginary Display for Active Channel N/A N/ARIM Selects Real And Imaginary Display for Active N/A N/A ChannelSME Selects Expanded Smith Chart Display for 10.20.30 DBL.XX1 Active ChannelISE Selects Inverted Expanded Smith Chart Display 10.20.30 DBL.XX1 for Active ChannelSMC Selects Compressed Smith Chart Display for 3 DBL.XX1 Active ChannelISC Selects Inverted Compressed Smith Chart 3 DBL.XX1 Display for Active ChannelSCL Sets Scaling Of Display On Active Channel Depends on Graph Type: Depends on Graph Type: Log Mag and Log Polar: 0.001 to 50 dB/div DBL.XX1.XX3.XM3 Phase: 0.01 to 90 degrees/div DEG (.XX1.XX3 XM3 for PHA display) Group Delay: 1 femtosecond/div to PSC.NSC.USC 999.999 s/div Linear Mag & Linear Polar: 1 nanounit/div to XX1.XX3.XM3 999.999 units/div Real: 1 nanounit/div to REU.XX1.XX3.XM3 999.999 units/div Imag: 1 nanounit/div to IMU (.XX1.XX3.XM3 999.999 units/div for IMG display) Smith/inverted Smith: N/A N/AOFF Set Offset of Display on Active Channel Depends On Graph Type: Depends On Graph Type: (This code moves the graph's reference position to the offset value) Log Mag & Log Polar: -999.999 to 999.999 dB DBL.XX1.XX3.XM3 Phase: -180 to 180 degrees DEG (.XX1.XX3.XM3 for PHA display) Group Delay: -999.999 to 999.999 s PSC.NSC.USC Linear Mag & Linear Polar: 0 to 999.999 units XX1.XX3.XM3 Real: -999.999 to 999.999 units REU.XX1.XX3.XM3 Imaginary -999.999 to 999.999 units IMU (.XX1.XX3.XM3 for IMG display) Smith/Inverted Smith: N/A N/AREF Set Reference Line of Display on Active Depends on Graph Type: Depends on Graph Type: Channel Log Magnitude, MAG Display: 0 to 8 DBL.XX1.XX3.XM3 Log Magnitude, MPH Display: 0 to 4 DBL.XX1.XX3.XM3 Phase, PHA Display: 0 to 8 DEG.XX1.XX3.XM3 Phase, MPH Display: 0 to 4 DEG Group Delay: 0 to 8 PSC.NSC.USC.XX1. XX3.XM3 Linear Magnitude, LIN Display: 0 to 8 XX1.XX3.XM3 Linear Magnitude, LPH Display: 0 to 4 XX1.XX3.XM3 Real, REL Display: 0 to 8 REU.XX1.XX3.XM3 Real, RIM Display: 0 to 4 REU.XX1.XX3.XM3 Imaginary, IMG Display: 0 to 8 IMU.XX1.XX3.XM3 Imaginary, RIM Display: 0 to 4 IMU Smith/Inverted Smith: N/A N/A Linear Polar/Log Polar: N/A N/AASC Autoscale Display On Active Channel N/A N/AAPR Set Group Delay Aperture Percentage 0 to 20 XX1.XX3.XM3__________________________________________________________________________
TABLE 4-8__________________________________________________________________________Enhancement Command CodesCOMMANDCODE DESCRIPTION VALUES TERMINATORS__________________________________________________________________________IFN Selects Normal IF Bandwidth N/A N/AIFR Selects Reduced IF Bandwidth N/A N/AIFM Selects Minimum IF Bandwidth N/A N/AAVG Turns ON Averaging and Sets to Value 1 to 4095 XX1.XX3.XM3AOF Turns Off Averaging N/A N/ASON Turns ON Smoothing and Sets to Value 0 to 20 XX1.XX3.XM3SOF Turns Off Smoothing N/A N/A__________________________________________________________________________
TABLE 4-9__________________________________________________________________________Reference Delay Command CodesCOMMANDCODE DESCRIPTION VALUES TERMINATORS__________________________________________________________________________RDD Sets Reference Delay As a Distance Value for -999.999 to 999.999 s MMT.CMT.MTR the Active ChannelRDT Sets Reference Delay As a Time Value for the -999.999 to 999.999 s PSC.NSC.USC Active ChannelRDA Selects Automatic Reference Delay for the N/A N/A Active ChannelDIA Selects Air Dielectric (1.00) N/A N/ADIT Selects Teflon Dielectric (2.10) N/A N/ADIP Selects Polyethylene Dielectric (2.26) N/A N/ADIM Selects Microporous Teflon Dielectric (1.69) N/A N/ADIE Sets Dielectric to Value 1 to 999.999 XX1.XX3.XM3__________________________________________________________________________
TABLE 4-10______________________________________Trace Memory Command CodesCOMMANDCODE DESCRIPTION______________________________________DAT Displays Data Trace on Active ChannelMEM Displays Memory Trace on Active ChannelDTM Displays Data and Memory Traces on Active ChannelDNM Displays Measured Data Normalized to Memory on Active ChannelMIN Selects Complex Subtraction As Trace Math on Active ChannelDIV Selects Complex Division As Trace Math on Active ChannelADD Selects Complex Addition As Trace Math on Active ChannelMUL Selects Complex Multiplication As Trace Math on Active ChannelSTD Stores Active Channel's Data Trace to MemorySDK Stores Active Channel's Trace Memory to Disk Under The Specified File NameRCK Retrieves Active Channel's Trace Memory From Disk File Specified______________________________________
TABLE 4-11__________________________________________________________________________Marker Command CodesCOMMANDCODE DESCRIPTION VALUES TERMINATORS__________________________________________________________________________MK1-MK6 Turns On Marker 1-6 and Sets Them to Value As Shown Below: Frequency Markers Limited to Current GHZ.MHZ.KHZ Sweep Range Time Markers: Limited to Current PSC.NSC.USC Zoom Range Distance Markers: Limited to Current MMT.CMT.MTR Zoom RangeMOF Disables Markers N/A N/AMON Enables Markers N/A N/AMO1-MO6 Turns Off Marker 1-6 N/A N/ADR1-DR6 Turns On Marker 1-6 As Delta Reference N/A N/A MarkerDRF Turns On Delta Reference Marker Mode N/A N/ADRO Turns Off Delta Reference Marker Mode N/A N/AMR1-MR6 Selects Marker 1-6 As Readout Marker N/A N/AMMX Moves Active Marker to Maximum Trace Value N/A N/AMMN Moves Active Marker to Minimum Trace Value N/A N/AM1S-M6S Marker Sweep With Marker 1-6 As Start N/A N/A FrequencyM1E-M6E Marker Sweep With Marker 1-6 As Stop N/A N/A FrequencyM1C-M6C CW Marker Sweep With Marker 1-6 As CW N/A N/A Frequency__________________________________________________________________________
TABLE 4-12__________________________________________________________________________Limits Command CodesCOMMANDCODE DESCRIPTION VALUES TERMINATORS__________________________________________________________________________LUP Turns On Limit 1 On the Active Channel and Depends On Graph Type: Depends On Graph Type: sets It to value, as Shown BelowLLO Turns On Limit 2 On the Active Channel and Depends On Graph Type: Depends On Graph Type: sets It to Value, as Shown BelowLFD Set Limit Delta On Active Channel for Limit Depends On Graph Type: Depends On Graph Type: Frequency Readout, as Shown Below Log Mag & Log Polar: -999.999 to 999.999 dB DBL.XX1.XX3.XM3 Phase: -180 to 180 degrees DEG (.XX1.XX3 XM3 for PHA display) Group Delay: -999.999 to 999.999 s PSC.NSC.USC Linear Mag & Linear Polar: 0 to 999.999 U XX1.XX3.XM3 Real: -999.999 to 999.999 U REU.XX1.XX3.XM3 Imaginary: -999.999 to 999.999 U IMU (.XX1.XX3.XM3 for IMG display) Smith/Inverted Smith: 0 to 1.413 units XX1.XX3.XM3LOF Disables Limits On Active Channel N/A N/ALON Enables Limits On Active Channel N/A N/ALFR Selects Limit Frequency Readout for Active N/A N/A ChannelLFP Selects Phase Limit Frequency Readout for Ac- N/A N/A tive Channel for Log Magnitude/linear Magnitude and Phase Displays__________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________10 ! EXAMPLE ON USE OF STRINGS20 Q$=CHR$ (34) ! QUOTE SYMBOL30 M$="4.sub.-- TO.sub.-- 8.sub.-- FILTR" ! MODEL40 I$="456789" ! I.D.50 D$="8/25/87" ! DATE60 O$="GPIB.sub.-- WHIZ" ! OPERATOR70 OUTPUT 706 "LMS"&Q$&M$&Q$80 OUTPUT 706 "LID"&Q$&I$&Q$90 OUTPUT 706 "LDT"&Q$&D$&Q$100 OUTPUT 706 "LNM"&Q$&O$&Q$110 END______________________________________
TABLE 4-13__________________________________________________________________________Hard Copy Command CodesCOMMANDCODE DESCRIPTION VALUES TERMINATORS__________________________________________________________________________PFS Prints Full Screen N/A N/APGR Prints Graph Area Only N/A N/APMK Prints Tabular Marker Data N/A N/APTB Prints Tabular Trace Data N/A N/APMT Prints Tabular Marker and Trace Data N/A N/APT0-PT9 Selects Tabular Printout Point Density N/A N/APST Stops Print/Plot N/A N/AFFD Printer Form Feed N/A N/APLS Plots Entire Screen N/A N/APLD Plots Graph Area N/A N/APLT Plots Data Trace(s) N/A N/APMN Plots Menu N/A N/APLM Plots Markers and Limits N/A N/APLH Plots Header N/A N/APGT Plots Graticule N/A N/APFL Selects Full Size Plot N/A N/APTL Selects 1/4 Size Plot, Top Left N/A N/APTR Selects 1/4 Size Plot, Top Right N/A N/APBL Selects 1/4 Size Plot, Bottom Left N/A N/APBR Selects 1/4 Size Plot, Bottom Right N/A N/ADPN Sets Pen Number for Plotting Data 1 to 8 XX1GPN Sets Pen Number for Plotting Graticule 1 to 8 XX1MPN Sets Pen Number for Plotting Markers and Limits 1 to 8 XX1HPN Sets Pen Number for Plotting Header 1 to 8 XX1LMS Labels Model and Serial Number of Device String of Characters Up N/A To 12 Characters LongLDT Labels Date of Test String of Characters Up N/A to 12 Characters LongLID Labels Device ID String of Characters Up N/A to 12 Characters LongLNM Labels Operator's Name String of Characters Up N/A to 12 Characters LongTDD Stores Tabular Data to Disk in File Specified N/A N/A (See File Naming Conventions In Paragraph 5-5.5)RTB Recalls Tabular Data From Disk File Specified to N/A N/A PrinterSPD Sets Plotter Pen Speed Percentage 10 to 100 XX1,XX3,XM3__________________________________________________________________________
TABLE 4-14__________________________________________________________________________Miscellaneous Command CodesCOMMANDCODE DEFINITION NOTES__________________________________________________________________________RST Resets 360 to its Default State Similar to pressing the "DEFAULT PROGRAM" key.FOF Implements Frequency Blanking Instructs the 360 to blank any frequency information from the screen and any hard copy output. This code is useful for security reasons.FON Disables Frequency Blanking Frequency blanking can be turned off using this code.BC0 Implements Display Blanking Allows for the ultimate in secutriy -- a totally blank screen. In this mode, the 360 is fully operational over the GPIB but nothing appears on the display.BC1 Disables Display Blanking Screen blanking is turned off using the BC1 mnemonic.BLU Selects Blue As 3rd Color Plane Color Allows selection of the third color used by the 360 for markers, limits, and some menu annotation.CYN Selects Cyan As 3rd Color Plane Color Allows selection of the third color used by the 360 for markers, limits, and some menu annotation.TST Runs A Self Test Instructs tho 360 to perform a self test. An error in the self test would be reported in the primary status byte, bit 7 (see paragraph 5-5.7).RTL Returns to Local Control Performs the same function as the control panel RETURN TO LOCAL key. This code has no effect if the 360 is in local lockout.DFP Displays Global Operating Parameters Displays Global Operating Parameters in the data area of the screen.DGS Displays GPIB System Parameters Displays GPIB System Parameters in the data area of the screen.DCP Displays Calibration Parameters Displays Calibration Parameters in the data area of the screen.DC1 Displays Channel 1 and 2 Operating Parameters Displays Channels 1 and 2 Operating Parameters in the data area of the screen.DC3 Displays Channel 3 and 4 Operating Parameters Displays Channels 1 and 2 Operating Parameters in the data area of the screen.__________________________________________________________________________
TABLE 5-1__________________________________________________________________________Calibration Command CodesCOMMANDCODE DESCRIPTION VALUES TERMINATORS__________________________________________________________________________RPC Repeat Previous Calibration N/A N/ALTC Specify Coaxial Line Type N/A N/ALTU Specify Microstrip Line Type N/A N/ALTW Specify Waveguide Line Type N/A N/ASCM Specify Standard Calibration Method N/A N/AOCM Specify Offset Short Calibration Method N/A N/ALCM Specify LRL Calibration Method N/A N/AC12 Begin 12-term Calibration N/A N/AC8T Begin 8-term (1 Port) Calibration N/A N/ACRF Begin Reflection Only (1 Port) Calibration N/A N/ACFR Begin Frequency Response Calibration N/A N/ACFT Begin Transmission Only Frequency Response N/A N/A CalibrationCRL Begin Reflection Only Frequency Response N/A N/A CalibrationNOC Specify Normal 501-point Calibration N/A N/ADFC Specify Discrete Frequency Calibration N/A N/ACWC Specify CW Calibration N/A N/ATDC Specify Time Domain Harmonic Calibration N/A N/ASRT Enter Start Frequency for Normal or Harmonic Depends on Frequency Range of GHZ,MHZ,KHZ CalibrationSTP Enter Stop Frequency for Normal or Harmonic Depends on Frequency Range of GHZ,MHZ,KHZ CalibrationDFQ Enter Discrete Frequency for Calibration Depends on Frequency Range of GHZ,MHZ,KHZCWF Enter CW Frequency for Calibration Depends on Frequency Range of GHZ,MHZ,KHZFRS Enter Fill Range Start Frequency Depends on Frequency Range of GHZ,MHZ,KHZFRI Enter Fill Range Frequency Increment Depends on Frequency Range of GHZ,MHZ,KHZFRP Enter Fill Rangs Number of Points 1 to (501 -- Current Number of XX1,XX3,XM3IFV Input Frequency List for Calibration List of Frequencies in Current Data Format N/AFIL Fill Frequency Range Defined by FRS, FRI, and FRP N/A N/ADFD Discrete Frequency Entry Done N/A N/AWCO Enter Waveguide Cutoff Frequency 0 -- Current Start Freqency GHZ,MHZ,KHZVSW Enter Microstrip Width 0.001 mm-1.0 m MMT,CMT,MTRSBT Enter Microstrip Substrate Thickness 0.001 mm-1.0 m MMT,CMT,MTRSBD Enter Microstrip Substrate Relative Dielectric 1.0-9999.99 XX1,XX3,XM3 ConstantUSE Enter Microstrip Effective Relative Dielectric 1.0-9999.99 XX1,XX3,XM3 ConstantUSZ Enter Microstrip Characteristic Impedance 1.0-9999.99 XX1,XX3,XM3P1C Set Up to Specify Port 1 Calibration Standards N/A N/AP2C Set Up to Specify Port 2 Calibration Standards N/A N/ACMS Male SMA Connector for Specified Port N/A N/ACFS Female SMA Connector for Specified Port N/A N/ACMK Male K .TM. Connector for Specified Port N/A N/ACFK Female K Connector for Specified Port N/A N/ACMN Male Type N Connector for Specified Port N/A N/ACFN Female Type N Connector for Specified Port N/A N/ACM3 Male GPC-3.5 Connector for Specified Port N/A N/ACF3 Female GPC-3.5 Connector for Specified Port N/A N/ACNG GPC-7 Connector for Specified Port N/A N/ACND Other Connector Specification N/A N/ACOO Connector Offset for Open Device -999.999 m to 999.999 m MMT,CMT,MTRCOS Connector Offset for Short Device -999.999 m to 999.999 m MMT,CMT,MTRCC0 Capacitance Coefficient for Open Device, -999.999 to 999.999 XX1 Implied X 10 E-15CC1 Capacitance Coefficient for Open Device, -999.999 to 999.999 XX1 Implied X 10 E-27CC2 Capacitance Coefficient for Open Device, -999.999 to 999.999 XX1 Implied X 10 E-36CC3 Capacitance Coefficient for Open Device, -999.999 to 999.999 XX1 Implied X 10 E-45BBL Specify Broadband Load for Calibration N/A N/ASLD Specify Sliding Load for Calibration N/A N/ABEG Begin Calibration Data Collection Steps N/A N/ATCD Take Calibration Data for Current Standard N/A N/ANCS Go on to Next Calibration Step N/A N/AKEC Keep Existing Calibration N/A N/ACOF Turn Any Vector Error Correction Off N/A N/ACON Turn Vector Error Correcion On if Available N/A N/AA12 Simulate 12-term Calibration N/A N/AA8T Simulate 8-term (1 Port) Calibration N/A N/AARF Simulate Reflection Only (1 Port) Calibration N/A N/AAFR Simulate Frequency Response Calibration N/A N/AAFT Simulate Transmission Only Frequency Response N/A N/A CalibrationARL Simulate Reflection Only Frequency Response N/A N/A Calibration__________________________________________________________________________
TABLE 5-2__________________________________________________________________________Calibration Code Ordering Command Code Required (R)Order Item Examples or Optional (O)__________________________________________________________________________1 Line Type LTC, LTW, LTV O2 Calibration Method SCM, OCM, LCM O3 Calibration Type C12, C8T, CRF, CFR, CFT, CRL R4 Data Points NOC, DFC, TDC, CWC O5 Frequency Range SRT, STP O Discrete DFQ, IFV, FRS, FRI, FRP, FIL R CW CWF O6 Connector Type/Offset P1C, P2C, CMS, CFS, CMK, CFK, O Short Values CMN, CFN, CM3, CF3, CNG, CND, COO, COS, CC0, CC1, CC2, CC3, SH1, SH27 Load Type SLD, BBL O8 Begin Data Collection Steps BEG R__________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________10 ! 1ST STEP - BROADBAND LOADS ON BOTH PORTS20 DISP "CONNECT LOADS TO BOTH PORTS"30 DISP "HIT END LINE WHEN READY"40 INPUT NS50 ! NS JUST A "DUMMY"[- WAIT FOR USER60 ! TAKE LOAD MEASUREMENT USING 100 AVERAGES70 OUTPUT 706; "AVG 100 XX1 TCD NCS"80 ! 2ND STEP - PORT 1: OPEN, PORT 2: SHORT90 DISP "CONNECT OPEN TO PORT 1"100 DISP "CONNECT SHORT TO PORT 2"110 DISP "HIT END LINE WHEN READY"120 INPUT NS130 ! TAKE OPEN/SHORT MEASUREMENT WITH 20 AVERAGES140 OUTPUT 706; "AVG 20 XX1 TCD NCS"150 ! 3RD STEP - PORT 1: SHORT, PORT 2: OPEN160 DISP "CONNECT SHORT TO PORT 1"170 DISP "CONNECT OPEN TO PORT 2"180 DISP "HIT END LINE WHEN READY"190 INPUT NS200 OUTPUT 706; "TCD NCS"210 ! 4TH STEP - THROUGH LINE220 DISP "CONNECT THROUGH LINE"230 DISP "BETWEEN PORTS"240 DISP "HIT END LINE WHEN READY"250 INPUT NS260 OUTPUT 706; "TCD NCS"270 CALIBRATION COMPLETE - SAVE TO DISK______________________________________
TABLE 5-3__________________________________________________________________________Advanced Command Codes: Save/RecallCOMMANDCODE DESCRIPT1ON VALUES TERMINATORS__________________________________________________________________________STO Store calibration data and front panel setup to String for file name up N/A disk file. to 8 characters longRLD Recall calibration data and front panel setup String for file name up N/A from disk file to 8 characters longSV1-SV4 Save front panel setup to internal memory N/A N/A location 1-4RC1-RC4 Recall front panel setup data from internal N/A N/A memory location 1-4__________________________________________________________________________
TABLE 5-4__________________________________________________________________________Data Transfer Command CodesCOMMANDCODE DESCRIPTION DATA FORMATS__________________________________________________________________________OM1-OM6 Output Marker 1-6 Value ASCIIOAP Output Active Parameter Value ASCIIOKP Output Front Panel Key Pressed ASCIIOID Output Identify String 40 byte ASCII StringONP Output Number of Points ASCIIFMA Select ASCII Data Format N/AFMB Select 64-Bit IEEE 754 Floating Point Data Format N/AFMC Select 32-Bit IEEE 754 Floating Point Data Format N/ALSB Select Least Significant Byte First Data Transfer N/AeMSB Select Most Significant Byte First Data Transfer N/AeOC1-OC9 Output Calibration Coefficient 1-9 FMA, FMB, FMCOCA-OCC Output Calibration Coefficient A, B or C FMA, FMB, FMCOCL Output All 12-Term Calibration Coefficients Binary StringIC1-IC9 Input Calibration Coefficient 1-9 FMA, FMB, FMCICA-ICC lnput Calibration Coefficient A, B, or C FMA, FMB, FMCICL Input All 12-term Calibration Coefficients Binary StringOFV Output Frequency Values FMA, FMB, FMCIFV Input List of Frequencies FMA, FMB, FMCOS1-OS4 Output Stored Setup 1-4 Binary StringOFP Output Current Front Panel Setup Binary StringIS1-IS4 Input Stored Setup 1-4 Binary StringIFP Input Front Panel Setup Binary StringODR Output Disk Directory Binary StringORD Output Raw (Uncorrected) Data For S-Parameter on Acive FMA, FMB, FMCOCD Output Corrected Data for S-Parameter on Active Channel FMA, FMB, FMCOFD Output Final (display Format) Data For S-parameter on Active Channel FMA, FMB, FMCICD Input Corrected Data For S-Parameter on Active Channel FMA, FMB, FMCIFD lnput Final (Display Format) Data For S-Parameter on Active Channel FMA, FMB, FMC__________________________________________________________________________
TABLE 5-5______________________________________OutPut Values Versus Various Graph TypesDisplay Type Output Values______________________________________Log Magnitude dB. DegreesPhase dB. DegreesLog Mag & Phase dB. DegreesLinear Magnitude Lin Mag(Rho or Tau), DegreesLinear Mag & Phase Lin Mag(Rho or Tau), DegreesSmith Chart Ohms, Ohms (r + jx)Inverted Smith Siemens, Siemens (g + jb)Group Delay Seconds, DegreesLog Polar dB, DegreesLinear Polar Lin Mag(Rho or Tau), DegreesReal Real, imagImaginary Real, imagReal & Imaginary Real, imagSWR SWR, Degrees______________________________________
______________________________________Number of Bytes4 9 9 6 6 6______________________________________xxxx xx.xxxxxx xx.xxxxxx Sxxx.x Sxxx.x xxx.xxModel # Low High Low High S.W. Freq. Freq. Pwr Pwr Rev. GHZ GHZ dBM dBM______________________________________
TABLE 5-6__________________________________________________________________________Calibration Coefficient OrderingCalibration Type Reflection Frequency Transmission ReflectionCoefficient 12-term 8-term Only Response Freq. Response Freq. Response# C12 C8T CRF CFR CFT CRL None__________________________________________________________________________1 EDF EDF EDF ERF ETF ERF --2 ESF ESF ESF ETF -- -- --3 ERF ERF ERF -- -- -- --4 EXF ETF -- -- -- -- --5 ELF -- -- -- -- -- --6 ETF -- -- -- -- -- --7 EDR -- -- -- -- -- --8 ESR -- -- -- -- -- --9 ERR -- -- -- -- -- --A EXR -- -- -- -- -- --B ELR -- -- -- -- -- --C ETR -- -- -- -- -- --__________________________________________________________________________
TABLE 5-8__________________________________________________________________________Disk Functions Command CodesCOMMANDCODE DESCRIPTION VALUES__________________________________________________________________________SDK Store Active Channel's Trace Memory to Disk File String Up to 8 Characters Long for File NameRCK Recall Active Channel's Trace Memory From String Up to 8 Characters Long for File Name Disk FileSTO Store Calibration Data and Front Panel Setup String Up to 8 Characters Long for File Name Information to Disk FileRLD Recall Calibration Data and Front Panel Setup String Up to 8 Characters Long for File Name Information From Disk FileTDD Store Tabular Printout Data to ASCII Disk File String Up to 8 Characters Long for File NameRTB Recall Tabular Data File From Disk to Output to String Up to 8 Characters Long for File Name PrinterDEC Delete Calibration and Front Panel Setup File String Up to 8 Characters Long for File Name From DiskDED Delete Tabular Printout Data File From Disk String Up to 8 Characters Long for File NameDEN Delete Trace Memory File From Disk String Up to 8 Characters Long for File NameINT lnitialize (Format) Disk in Drive as a Data-Only N/A DiskLKT Load Calibration Kit Information From Disk N/A__________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________! EXAMPLE 1 - SAVE CAL AND FRONT! PANEL SETUP TO DISKQ$ = CHR$(34) ! DOUBLE QUOTE SYMBOL(")C$ = "12.sub.-- TERM" ! FILE NAME FOR CAL DATA! STORE TO DISK FILE "12.sub.-- TERM. CAL"OUTPUT 706; "STO" &Q$&C$&Q$! EXAMPLE 2 - SAVE TABULAR DATA! TO DISK FILEQ$ = CHR$(34) ! DOUBLE QUOTE SYMBOL(")T$ = "S21.sub.-- THRU" ! FILE NAME FOR TAB DATA! STORE TO DISK FILE "S21.sub.-- THRU. DAT"OUTPUT 706; "TDD"&Q$&T$&Q$! EXAMPLE 3 - SAVE TRACE MEMORY! TO DISK, RECALL IT ON A DIFFERENT! CHANNEL AND THEN DELETE FILEOUTPUT 706; "CH1 D13 S11 CH3 S21 FHI WFS"OUTPUT 706; "CH1 STD" ! STORE TRACE TO MEMORYQ$ = CHR(34) ! DOUBLE QUOTE SYMBOL(")N$ = "S11TRACE" ! FILE NAME FOR TRACE DATA! STORE TO DISK FILE "S11TRACE.NRM"OUTPUT 706; "SDK"&Q$&N$&Q$! RECALL SAME DATA ON CHANNEL 3OUTPUT 706; "CH3 RCK" &Q$&N$&Q$! DELETE THE TRACE MEMORY FILEOUTPUT 706; "DKN" &Q$&N$&Q$______________________________________
______________________________________Primary Status Byte:Bit #7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0______________________________________Self SRQ 2nd Action Out Syntax Sweep CalTest Byte Not of Error Complete SweepFail Has Pos- Range in Hold Com- Status sible plete______________________________________
______________________________________Secondary Status Byte:Bit #7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0______________________________________Power Key X* X X Hard- X DiskOn Pressed ware Error Error______________________________________ *X denotes not used.
TABLE 5-10__________________________________________________________________________Time Domain Command CodesCOMMANDCODE DESCRIPTION VALUES TERMINATORS__________________________________________________________________________FQD Select Frequency Domain for Active Channel N/A N/ATBP Select Bandpass Mode With Time Readouts for N/A N/A active ChannelDBP Select Bandpass Mode With Distance Readouts N/A N/A for Active ChannelTPI Select Phasor Impulse Mode With Time N/A N/A Readouts for Active ChannelDPI Select Phasor lmpulse Mode With Distance N/A N/A Readouts for Active ChannelTLP Select Lowpass Mode With Time Readouts for N/A N/A Active ChannelDLP Select Lowpass Mode With Distance Readouts N/A N/A for Active ChannelFGT Select Frequency With Time Gate Mode N/A N/ALPI Select Lowpass Impulse Response for Active N/A N/A ChannelLPS Select Lowpass Step Response for Active N/A N/A ChannelGCN Turn Gate On on Active Channel N/A N/AGCF Turn Gate Off on Active Channel N/A N/AGDS Display Gate Symbols on Active Channel With N/A N/A Gate OffZST Set Start of Time Domain Zoom Range for All Channels in Time Domain Time Mode: -999.999 to 999.999 us PSC, NSC, USC Distance Mode: -999.999 to 999.999 m MMT, CMT, MTRZSP Set Stop of Time Domain Zoom Range for All Channels in Time Domain Time Mode: -999.999 to 999.999 us PSC, NSC, USC Distance Mode: -999.999 to 999.999 m MMT, CMT, MTRZCT Set Center of Time Domain Zoom Range for All Channels in Time Domain Time Mode: -999.999 to 999.999 us PSC, NSC, USC Distance Mode: -999.999 to 999.999 m MMT, CMT, MTRZSN Set Span of Time Domain Zoom Range for All Channels in Time Domain Time Mode: 0 to 999.999 us PSC, NSC, USC Distance Mode: 0 to 999.999 m MMT, CMT, MTRGST Set Gate Start Value for All Channels in Time Domain Time Mode: -999.999 to 999.999 us PSC, NSC, USC Distance Mode: -999.999 to 999.999 m MMT, CMT, MTRGSP Set Gate Stop Value for all Channels in Time Domain Time Mode: -999.999 to 999.999 us PSC, NSC, USC Distance Mode: -999.999 to 999.999 m MMT, CMT, MTRGCT Set Gate Center Value for All Channels in Time Domain Time Mode: 0.0000 to 999.999 us PSC, NSC, USC Distance Mode: 0.0000 to 999.999 m MMT, CMT, MTRGSN Set Gate Span Value for all Channels in Time Domain Time Mode: 0.0000 to 999.999 us PSC, NSC, USC Distance Mode: 0.0000 to 999.999 m MMT, CMT, MTRGRT Select Rectangular Gate Shape for all Time N/A N/A Domain ChannelsGNM Select Nominal Gate Shape for all Time Domain N/A N/A ChannelsGLS Select Low Sidelobe Gate Shape for all Time N/A N/A Domain ChannelsGMS Select Minimum Sidelobe Gate Shape for all N/A N/A Time Domain ChannelsWRT Select Rectangular Window Shape for all Time N/A N/A Domain ChannelsWNM Select Nominal Window Shape for all Time N/A N/A Domain ChannelsWLS Select Low Sidelobe Window Shape for all Time N/A N/A Domain ChannelsWMS Select Minimum Sidelobe Window Shape for all N/A N/A Time Domain ChannelsMRR Restore Original Range After a Marker Zoom N/A N/A OperationDCA Select Auto d.c. term for Low Pass N/A N/ADCZ Select Line Impedance d.c. term for Low Pass N/A N/ADCO Select Open d.c. Term for Low Pass N/A N/ADCS Select Short d.c. Term for Low Pass N/A N/ADCV* Sect Low Pass d.c Term to Value -100M .OMEGA. to 1000M .OMEGA. XX1, XX3, XM3__________________________________________________________________________

Number	Name	Date
4375698	Onotera et al.	Mar 1983
4510622	Mori et al.	Apr 1985
4545072	Skutta	Oct 1985
4551856	Victor et al.	Nov 1985
4661995	Kashiwagi	Apr 1987
4742561	Tipton	May 1988
4839578	Roos	Jun 1989
4982164	Schiek et al.	Jan 1991
5233418	Gumm et al.	Aug 1993

	Number	Date
Parent	764975	Sep 1991
Parent	644684	Jan 1991
Parent	507109	Apr 1990
Parent	176202	Mar 1988

Apparatus and method for measuring the phase and magnitude of microwave signals

Information

Patent Number

Date Filed

Date Issued

Inventors

Original Assignees

Examiners

Agents

CPC

US Classifications

Field of Search

US

International Classifications

Abstract

Description

Claims

Parent Case Info

US Referenced Citations (9)

Continuations (4)